Manual Servicio Brother MFC - J280W

Inkjet DCP/MFC
SERVICE MANUAL
DCPJ525W/J725DW/J925DW
MFCJ280W/J425W/J430W/J435W
MFCJ625DW/J825DW/J835DW
Read this manual thoroughly before maintenance work.

Keep this manual in a convenient place for quick and easy reference at all times.
April 2011
SM-FAX124
8CAM05
Confidential
Copyright Brother 2011

All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means without permission in writing
from the publisher.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
Multi-Function Link is a registered trademark of Brother International Corporation.
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.
Adobe, Flash, Illustrator, PageMaker and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance
Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
PowerPC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO, Memory Stick PRO Duo, Memory Stick Duo, MagicGate Memory
Stick, Memory Stick Micro and M2 are trademarks of Sony Corporation.
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.
Wi-Fi, WPA, WPA2, Wi-Fi Protected Access and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are either trademarks or
registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance in the United States and/or other countries.
Intel and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
FaceFilter Studio is a trademark of Reallusion, Inc.
BRAdmin Professional is a trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
CorelDraw, Corel Paint Shop Pro and Corel WordPerfect are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Corel Corporation and/or its subsidiaries in Canada, the United States and/or other countries.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement
specific to its proprietary programs.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related
documents and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those
respective companies.
Confidential
The table below shows the functional comparison between the models covered by this manual.
Model
LCD
Touch panel
Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
PhotoCapture
Center
PictBridge/
USB flash memory
drive
ADF
Disc print
Duplex print
Home key
Main PCB
Speaker
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
1.9-inch color
----
---
---
Model
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
LCD
1.9-inch color
DCPJ925DW
3.3-inch color
MFCJ280W
MFCJ435W
----
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
------
--
B57U081
------
-------
-------
-------
B57U082
MFCJ835DW
Touch panel
---
Wireless LAN
PhotoCapture Center
PictBridge/
USB flash memory
drive
ADF
Disc print
---
Duplex print
B57U082
B57U082
3.3-inch color
Wired LAN
Home key
Main PCB
Speaker
--
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
1.9-inch color
--------
B57U081
Confidential
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS............................................................................................................ i
REGULATION....................................................................................................................... viii
SAFETY INFORMATION...................................................................................................... xiii
CHAPTER 1
1
SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 1-1
GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1
General.................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2
Media Specifications.............................................................................................. 1-2
1.3
Paper Handling...................................................................................................... 1-5
1.4
LCD/Panel ............................................................................................................. 1-6
1.5
Memory.................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.6
Interface................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.7
Others.................................................................................................................... 1-9
TELEPHONE ................................................................................................................ 1-11
FAX............................................................................................................................... 1-12
PRINTER ...................................................................................................................... 1-13
COPY............................................................................................................................ 1-14
SCANNER .................................................................................................................... 1-15
SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................. 1-16
NETWORK ................................................................................................................... 1-17
8.1
Network ............................................................................................................... 1-17
8.2
Wired ................................................................................................................... 1-17
8.3
Wireless............................................................................................................... 1-18
SUPPLIES/OPTIONS ................................................................................................... 1-19
10 SERVICE INFORMATION............................................................................................ 1-20

11 PAPER ......................................................................................................................... 1-21
11.1 Paper Specifications............................................................................................ 1-21
11.2 Printable Area...................................................................................................... 1-24
CHAPTER 2
1
ERROR INDICATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING..................................... 2-1
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 2-1

1.1
Precautions............................................................................................................ 2-1
i
Confidential
1.2
2
Initial Check ........................................................................................................... 2-2
OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................... 2-3

2.1
Cross-section Drawings and Components ............................................................ 2-3
2.2
Paper Path for Documents and Recording Paper ................................................. 2-4
2.3
Parts Names and Functions .................................................................................. 2-5
2.4
Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 2-6
2.5
Components .......................................................................................................... 2-7
ERROR INDICATION ..................................................................................................... 2-8

3.1
Error Codes ........................................................................................................... 2-8
3.2
Error Messages ................................................................................................... 2-12
3.3
Communications Error Codes ............................................................................. 2-15
3.4
Status Monitor Errors........................................................................................... 2-19
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................. 2-21

4.1
Error Cause and Solutions .................................................................................. 2-21
4.2
Recording Paper or Disc Tray Feeding Problems ............................................... 2-57
4.2.1
Recording paper not fed from paper tray (Error code 18, 82, etc.) ............. 2-57
4.2.2
Disc tray not fed in (Error code 91) ............................................................. 2-58
4.2.3
Two or more sheets of paper fed at a time ................................................. 2-58
4.2.4
Recording paper jam ................................................................................... 2-59
4.2.5
Disc tray jam (Error code 31, 38, 3C, 84, 8A, 8B, 8C, 90) .......................... 2-61
4.2.6
Recording paper stained ............................................................................. 2-62
4.2.7
Disc tray stained.......................................................................................... 2-63
4.3
Print-image Problems .......................................................................................... 2-64
4.3.1
Defective images......................................................................................... 2-64
4.3.2
Troubleshooting from image defect............................................................. 2-65
4.4
Software-related Problems .................................................................................. 2-76
4.4.1
4.5
Network Problems ............................................................................................... 2-77
4.5.1
4.6
Cannot print data......................................................................................... 2-76
Cannot make a print through network connection....................................... 2-77
Document Feeding Problems .............................................................................. 2-78
4.6.1
Cannot feed documents .............................................................................. 2-78
4.6.2
Document double feeding ........................................................................... 2-78
4.6.3
Document jam ............................................................................................. 2-79
4.6.4
Wrinkles on documents ............................................................................... 2-80
4.7
Scanned-image Problems ................................................................................... 2-81
4.7.1
Defective images......................................................................................... 2-81

ii
Confidential
4.7.2
Troubleshooting from image defect............................................................. 2-81
4.7.3
Other scanning problems ............................................................................ 2-85
4.8
Control Panel Problems....................................................................................... 2-86
4.8.1
LCD shows nothing ..................................................................................... 2-86
4.8.2
Control panel inoperative ............................................................................ 2-86
4.8.3
Lamps on the control panel do not light ...................................................... 2-87
4.8.4
Touch panel inoperative (For models with touch panel) ............................. 2-87
4.8.5
Display defect on the LCD .......................................................................... 2-87
4.9
Fax Problems ...................................................................................................... 2-88
4.9.1
No faxes can be sent .................................................................................. 2-88
4.9.2
Speed dialing will not work.......................................................................... 2-88
4.9.3
No faxes can be received............................................................................ 2-89
4.9.4
A communications error occurs................................................................... 2-89
4.9.5
Receive mode cannot be changed.............................................................. 2-89
4.9.6
Caller ID not displayed ................................................................................ 2-89
4.10 Other Problems ................................................................................................... 2-90

4.10.1 The machine cannot be powered on or nothing appears on the LCD......... 2-90
4.10.2 When the power is on, the scanner crackles .............................................. 2-90
4.10.3 Memory card/PictBridge does not function ................................................. 2-90
4.10.4 Cannot read data from memory card loaded in the media slot ................... 2-91
4.10.5 Internal memory errors ................................................................................ 2-91
4.10.6 Cannot load firmware .................................................................................. 2-91
4.10.7 Secure Function Lock related problems...................................................... 2-92
4.10.8 Problems with "Printing with black ink only" ................................................ 2-92
4.10.9 Status monitor error "Disc Guide is Open" appears .................................... 2-92
CHAPTER 3 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ............................................................... 3-1
1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND HANDLING NOTES ................................................... 3-1
PACKING ....................................................................................................................... 3-3
SCREW CATALOGUE................................................................................................... 3-4
SCREW TORQUE LIST ................................................................................................. 3-5
LUBRICATION ............................................................................................................... 3-6
OVERVIEW OF GEARS............................................................................................... 3-13
ROUTING OF HARNESSES, FLAT CABLES and INK SUPPY TUBES .................... 3-14
DISASSEMBLY FLOW ................................................................................................ 3-28

iii
Confidential
DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE .................................................................................... 3-30

9.1
Preparation .......................................................................................................... 3-30
9.2
Jam Clear Cover.................................................................................................. 3-35
9.3
Head/Carriage Unit.............................................................................................. 3-36
9.4
Document Scanner Unit and Scanner Cover Support......................................... 3-49
9.5
ADF & Document Cover ASSY (For models with ADF),

Document Cover ASSY (For models without ADF) ............................................. 3-54
9.6
Disassembly of ADF & Document Cover ASSY (For models with ADF) ............. 3-56
9.7
Control Panel ASSY ............................................................................................ 3-68
9.8
Disassembly of Control Panel ASSY................................................................... 3-70
9.9
Speaker*, Front Cover and Wireless LAN PCB................................................... 3-74
9.10 Upper Cover, Ink Cartridge Cover and Media Module Cover.............................. 3-76
9.11 Main PCB ............................................................................................................ 3-78
9.12 PS/MJ Shield Unit (MJ PCB*1 and Power Supply PCB) ..................................... 3-83
9.13 CR Encoder Strip and its Guard Film .................................................................. 3-88
9.14 Carriage PCB ASSY, Ink Refill ASSY and Ink Cartridge Detection Sensor
PCB ..................................................................................................................... 3-90
9.15 Ink Absorber Box and Ink Absorber Felt (for Ink Refill ASSY)............................. 3-97
9.16 Engine Unit and Flushing Box ............................................................................. 3-99
9.17 Components on the Engine Unit........................................................................ 3-103
9.18 Ink Cartridge Cover Sensor ASSY, Disc Guide Cover*, Disc Guide* and
Disc Guide Sensor ASSY*................................................................................. 3-113
9.19 Bank ASSY and Base Pads on the Paper Tray ASSY ...................................... 3-115
CHAPTER 4 ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS, REQUIRED AFTER
PARTS REPLACEMENT............................................................................... 4-1
1
IF YOU REPLACE THE HEAD/CARRIAGE UNIT OR ENGINE UNIT .......................... 4-1

1.1
Update the head property data stored in the EEPROM on the main PCB*........... 4-2
1.2
Clean the new head/carriage unit (Function code 76)........................................... 4-5
1.3
Print out a nozzle test pattern (Function code 09)................................................. 4-6
1.4
Adjust the inclination of the head/carriage unit...................................................... 4-7
1.5
Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58)........................... 4-10
1.6
Align vertical print lines in monochrome (Function code 65) ............................... 4-10
1.7
Adjust margins in borderless printing (Function code 66) ................................... 4-10
1.8
Create head calibration data and write it into flash ROM

(Function code 02)............................................................................................... 4-10
1.9
Check the operation of the pressure roller (Function code 63) ........................... 4-10
1.10 Print out a total quality check pattern .................................................................. 4-11

1.11 Switch back to standby........................................................................................ 4-15
iv
Confidential
1.12 Replace the ink cartridges with the protective part.............................................. 4-15
1.13 Obtain machine information at the user site (Instruction to the end user) ........... 4-15
2
IF YOU REPLACE THE MAIN PCB............................................................................. 4-16

2.1
Load update programs/data ................................................................................ 4-17
2.1.1
If the main PCB is replaced with a new one................................................ 4-17
2.1.2
If the main PCB loaded with programs is used

(Updating existing programs) ...................................................................... 4-20
2.2
Customize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 74).......................... 4-22
2.3
Initialize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 01).............................. 4-22
2.4
Load local programs ............................................................................................ 4-22
2.5
Restore machine information (Function code 46)................................................ 4-22
2.6
Restore head calibration data (Function code 68)............................................... 4-22
2.7
Check the sensor operation (Function code 32).................................................. 4-22
2.8
Specify the CIS type (Function code 59) ............................................................. 4-22
2.9
Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55) ............. 4-23
2.10 Set an ID code (change the serial number) and update the head property
data...................................................................................................................... 4-23
2.11 Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58)........................... 4-25
2.12 Align vertical print lines (Function code 65)......................................................... 4-25
2.13 Adjust margins in borderless printing (Function code 66) .................................. 4-25
2.14 Create head calibration data and write it into flash ROM (Function code 02) ..... 4-25
2.15 Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart in ADF scanning..... 4-25
2.16 Print out a total quality check pattern .................................................................. 4-25
2.17 Adjust the touch panel (Function code 78) (For models with touch panel).......... 4-25
2.18 Switch back to standby........................................................................................ 4-25
3
IF YOU REPLACE THE ADF OR ADF-RELATED PARTS ......................................... 4-26

3.1
IF YOU REPLACE THE INK ABSORBER BOX OR FLUSHING BOX ....................... 4-29
4.1
Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart in ADF scanning..... 4-26
Reset each of the purge and flushing counts ...................................................... 4-29
IF YOU REPLACE THE CONTROL PANEL ASSY, PANEL PCB OR LCD UNIT...... 4-30
5.1
Adjust the touch panel (Function code 78) (For models with touch panel).......... 4-30
5.2
Check LCD operation (Function code 12) ........................................................... 4-30
5.3
Check the operation of the panel PCB (Function code 13) ................................. 4-30
IF YOU REPLACE THE FB UNIT* OR DOCUMENT SCANNER UNIT ...................... 4-31

6.1
Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55).............. 4-31
6.2
Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart in ADF scanning..... 4-31
v
Confidential
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE FUNCTIONS ................................................................................. 5-1

1
MAINTENANCE MODE ................................................................................................ 5-1

1.1
Entry to the Maintenance Mode............................................................................. 5-1
1.1.1
How to Enter the End User-accessible Maintenance Mode.......................... 5-1
1.1.2
How to Enter the Maintenance Mode Exclusive to Service Personnel ......... 5-2
1.2
Key Operation in Maintenance Mode .................................................................... 5-2
1.2.1
Entering a Desired Function Code at the Initial Stage of the Maintenance

Mode ............................................................................................................. 5-2
1.2.2
Keys to be Used in the Maintenance Mode .................................................. 5-3
1.3
List of Maintenance-mode Functions..................................................................... 5-4
1.4
Detailed Description of Maintenance-mode Functions .......................................... 5-5
1.4.1
EEPROM Parameter Initialization (Function code 01, 91) ............................ 5-5
1.4.2
Creating of Head Calibration Data and Writing it into Flash ROM

(Function code 02) ........................................................................................ 5-6
1.4.3
Printout of Scanning Compensation Data (Function code 05) ...................... 5-9
1.4.4
ADF Performance Test (Function code 08) ................................................ 5-11
1.4.5
Printout of Nozzle Test Pattern (Function code 09) .................................... 5-12
1.4.6
Firmware Switch Setting and Printout (Function codes 10 and 11)

(User-accessible) ........................................................................................ 5-14
1.4.7
Operational Check of LCD (Function code 12) (User-accessible) .............. 5-17
1.4.8
Operational Check of Panel PCB (Function code 13)................................. 5-18
1.4.9
EEPROM Dump and Log Information Transfer (Function code 17)

(User-accessible) ........................................................................................ 5-20
1.4.10 Updating of Firmware Using an External Memory (Function code 28) ....... 5-21
1.4.11 Sensor Operational Check (Function code 32) ........................................... 5-22
1.4.12 Backup of Machine Information (Function code 46) (User-accessible)....... 5-24
1.4.13 Setting of Country/Language (Function code 52) (User-accessible) .......... 5-26
1.4.14 Transfer of Received FAX Data and/or Equipment's Log
(Function code 53) (User-accessible) ......................................................... 5-27
1.4.15 Fine Adjustment of Scanning Position (Function code 54) ......................... 5-30
1.4.16 Acquisition of White Level Data and CIS Scanner Area Setting
(Function code 55) ...................................................................................... 5-31
1.4.17 Updating of Paper Feeding Correction Value (Function code 58) .............. 5-32
1.4.18 Checking of CIS Travel and Specifying of CIS Type (Function code 59).... 5-39
1.4.19 Printout of PRN/JPEG Files in Memory Card (Function code 61)............... 5-40
1.4.20 Travel Check of the Head/Carriage Unit and Operational Check of the
Pressure Roller (Function code 63) ............................................................ 5-41
1.4.21 Alignment of Vertical Print Lines in Monochrome (Function code 65) ........ 5-42
vi
Confidential
1.4.22 Margin Adjustment in Borderless Printing (Function code 66)

(User-accessible) ........................................................................................ 5-44
1.4.23 Updating of Head Property Data and Backup/Restoration of Head
Calibration Data (Function code 68) ........................................................... 5-48
1.4.24 Traveling Speed Check of Head/Carriage Unit (Function code 69) ............ 5-50
1.4.25 Cleaning of Leveler Roller (LR) ASSY (Function code 70) ......................... 5-51
1.4.26 EEPROM Customizing (Function code 74)................................................. 5-52
1.4.27 Travel of Head/Carriage Unit (for removing paper particles and
dust accumulated on the maintenance unit) (Function code 75)
(User-accessible) ........................................................................................ 5-56
1.4.28 Purge Operation (Function code 76) (User-accessible).............................. 5-57
1.4.29 Print of the Equipments Log (Function code 77) ........................................ 5-60
1.4.30 Adjustment of Touch Panel (Function code 78) .......................................... 5-63
1.4.31 Display of the Equipment's Log (Function code 80) (User-accessible)....... 5-65
1.4.32 Equipment Error Code Indication (Function code 82) (User-accessible) .... 5-70
1.4.33 Assurance Mode Switch Setting (Function code 88) (User-accessible) ..... 5-70
2
OTHER SERVICE FUNCTIONS .................................................................................. 5-78

2.1
Cancellation of the Pin TX Lock Mode (Not applicable to Japanese and

U.S.A. models) .................................................................................................... 5-78
2.2
Displaying the Firmware Version......................................................................... 5-78
2.3
Moving the Head/Carriage Unit ........................................................................... 5-78
2.4
Retrieving the Equipment Log Information .......................................................... 5-79
CHAPTER 6 Circuit Diagrams and Wiring Diagrams ..................................................... 6-1

APPENDIX 1 SERIAL NUMBERING SYSTEM .......................................................... App. 1-1
APPENDIX 2 DELETION OF USER SETTING INFORMATION ................................ App. 2-1
A2.1 Deleting User Setting Info from the Machine.......................................... App. 2-1
APPENDIX 3 INSTALLING THE MAINTENANCE PRINTER DRIVER ..................... App. 3-1
vii
Confidential
REGULATION
Standard telephone and FCC notices (MFC models only)
These notices are in effect on models sold and used in the United States only. When
programming emergency numbers or making test calls to emergency numbers:
Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging
up.
Perform these activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the
ACTA. On the backside of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be
provided to the telephone company.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone line by means of a standard modular
jack, USOC RJ11C.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network
must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A
compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be
connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for
details.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be
certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total
RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the
REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(e.g., 06 is a REN of 0.6). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you
in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't
practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be
advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
viii
Confidential
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of Conformity (USA
only)
Product Name: MFC-J280W/J425W/J430W/J625DW/J825DW/J835DW
ix
Confidential
Industry Canada Compliance Statement (Canada only)

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES003.
Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB003 du Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
L'utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes:
(1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter
tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le
fonctionnement du dispositif.
EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT LIMITATIONS (Canada only) (MFC models only)

NOTICE
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
NOTICE
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to
be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the
devices does not exceed five.
For use in the USA or Canada only

These machines are made for use in the USA and Canada only. We cannot recommend using
them overseas because it may violate the Telecommunications Regulations (MFC models only)
of that country and the power requirements of your machine may not be compatible with the
power available in foreign countries. Using USA or Canada models overseas is at your own risk
and may void your warranty.
LAN connection (Network models only)
Confidential
Declaration of Conformity (Europe only)

We, Brother Industries, Ltd.
15-1, Naeshiro-cho, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8561 Japan
declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements of Directives 1999/5/
EC and 2009/125/EC.
The Declaration of Conformity (DoC) is on our Website.
Please go to http://solutions.brother.com/
-> choose region (eg. Europe)
-> choose country
-> choose your model
-> choose "Manuals"
-> choose Declaration of Conformity (Select Language when required.)
Wiring information (U.K. only)

If you need to replace the plug fuse, fit a fuse that is approved by ASTA to BS1362 with the
same rating as the original fuse. Always replace the fuse cover. Never use a plug that does not
have a cover. If in any doubt, call a qualified electrician.
Warning - This machine must be earthed.
The wires in the mains lead are colored in line with the following code:
- Green and Yellow: Earth
- Blue: Neutral
- Brown: Live
Radio interference
This product complies with EN55022 (CISPR Publication 22)/Class B. When connecting the
machine to a computer, ensure that you use a USB cable which does not exceed 2 m in length.
xi
Confidential
Recycling information in accordance with the WEEE (2002/96/EC) and Battery
(2006/66/EC) Directives
Product mark
Battery mark
European Union only
The product/battery is marked with one of the above recycling symbols. It indicates that at the
end of the life of the product/battery, you should dispose of it separately at an appropriate
collection point and not place it in the normal domestic waste stream.
For products with user replaceable batteries please refer to the users guide for replacement
instructions.
International ENERGY STAR Qualification Statement

The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR Program is to promote the development and
popularization of energy-efficient equipment.
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product
meets the ENERGY STAR specifications for energy efficiency.
xii
Confidential
SAFETY INFORMATION
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injuries.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT indicate a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
damage to property or loss of product functionality.
Notes tell you how you should respond to a situation that may arise or give tips about
how the operation works with other features.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.
Improper Setup icons alert you to devices and operations that are not compatible with
the machine.
Fire Hazard icons alert you to the possibility of fire.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine.
xiii
Confidential
xiv
Confidential
xv
Confidential
xvi
Confidential
xvii
Confidential
xviii
Confidential
CHAPTER 1 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter lists the specifications of each model, which enables you to make a comparison of
different models.
GENERAL
1.1
General
Model
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
Print Head
DCPJ925DW
BH11
BK: 3 pl
CMY: 1.5 pl
Minimum Droplet Size

Scanning Method
CIS
CPU Speed
RISC 192 MHz
Backup Clock
Yes
MFCJ280W/J425W/J430W/J435W/J625DW/J825DW/J835DW
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
Print Head
MFCJ435W
BH11
BK: 3 pl
CMY: 1.5 pl

Scanning Method
CIS
CPU Speed
RISC 192 MHz
Backup Clock
Model
Print Head
Yes
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
BH11
BK: 3 pl
CMY: 1.5 pl
Scanning Method
CPU Speed
MFCJ835DW
CIS
RISC 192 MHz
Backup Clock
Yes
1-1
Confidential
1.2
Media Specifications
Model
Standard Tray
Media
Sizes
Photo Tray
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
A4, LTR, LGL, EXE,

JIS B5*1, A5, A6,
Photo (102x152 mm/4x6"),
Indexcard (127x203 mm/5x8"), A4, LTR, EXE, JIS B5*1, A5, A6, Photo (102x152 mm/4x6"),
Photo-2L (127x178 mm/5x7"), Indexcard (127x203 mm/5x8"), Photo-2L (127x178 mm/5x7"),
Post Card 1*1
Post Card 1*1 (100x148 mm/3.9x5.8"),
Post Card 2*1 (Double)(148x200 mm/5.8x7.9"),
(100x148 mm/3.9x5.8"),
Post Card 2*1 (Double)
C5 Envelope, Com-10, DL Envelope, Monarch
(148x200 mm/5.8x7.9"),
C5 Envelope, Com-10,
DL Envelope, Monarch
Photo (102 x 152 mm / 4 x 6"),
Photo-L (89 x 127 mm / 3.5 x 5")
N/A
N/A
Lower Tray
Duplex
N/A
<PC Print>
A4/LTR/EXE/A5/A6
<Copy>
Letter/A4/A5
ADF
(width/length)
N/A
148/148 mm to 215.9/355.6 mm (5.8/5.8" to 8.5/14.0")
Scanner Glass
(width/length)
Up to 215.9/297 mm (up to 8.5/11.7")
Standard Tray
64-220 g/m2 (17-58 lb.)
Photo Tray
Media
Lower Tray
Weights
Duplex
ADF
Photo Tray
64-220 g/m2 (17-58 lb.)
N/A
N/A
N/A
64-105 g/m2 (17-28 lb.)
N/A
64-90 g/m2 (17-24 lb.)
Standard Tray
Media
Types
DCPJ925DW
Plain, Inkjet, Glossy (cast/resin coated), Transparency

N/A
Plain, Inkjet, Glossy (cast/resin coated)

N/A
Lower Tray
Duplex
N/A
Plain
ADF
N/A
Plain
*1 User defined.
1-2
Confidential
Model
MFCJ280W
Standard Tray
Media
Sizes
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
Photo Tray
N/A
Lower Tray
N/A
Duplex
N/A
ADF
(width/length)
N/A
148/148 mm to 215.9/355.6 mm (5.8/5.8" to 8.5/14.0")
Scanner Glass
(width/length)
Up to 215.9/297 mm (up to 8.5/11.7")
Standard Tray
64-220 g/m2 (17-58 lb.)
Photo Tray
N/A
Lower Tray
Media
Weights
Duplex
N/A
ADF
64-105 g/m2
(17-28 lb.)
N/A
64-90 g/m2 (17-24 lb.)
N/A
Standard Tray
Media
Types
Photo Tray
N/A
Lower Tray
N/A
Duplex
N/A
ADF
MFCJ435W
A4, LTR, LGL, EXE, JIS B5*1, A5, A6, Photo

(102x152 mm/4x6"), Indexcard
(127x203 mm/5x8"), Photo-2L
(127x178 mm/5x7"), Post Card 1*1 (100x148 mm/3.9x5.8"),
Post Card 2*1 (Double) (148x200 mm 5.8x7.9"),
N/A
Plain
*1 User defined.
1-3
Confidential
Model
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
A4, LTR, LGL, EXE, JIS B5*1, A5, A6,
Standard Tray
Photo Tray
Media
Sizes
Photo (102 x 152 mm / 4 x 6"),

Photo-L (89 x 127 mm / 3.5 x 5")
N/A
Lower Tray
Duplex
<PC Print>
A4/LTR/EXE/A5/A6
<Copy>
Letter/A4/EXE*2/A5
ADF
(width/length)
148/148 mm to 215.9/355.6 mm (5.8/5.8" to 8.5/14.0")
Scanner Glass
(width/length)
Up to 215.9/297 mm (up to 8.5/11.7")
Standard Tray
64-220 g/m2 (17-58 lb.)
Photo Tray
Media
Lower Tray
Weights
Duplex
ADF
Standard Tray
Media
Types
Photo (102x152 mm/4x6"),

Indexcard (127x203 mm/5x8"),
Photo-2L (127x178 mm/5x7"),
Post Card 1*1 (100x148 mm/3.9x5.8"),
Post Card 2*1 (Double)
(148x200 mm 5.8x7.9"),
64-220 g/m2 (17-58 lb.)

N/A
64-105 g/m2 (17-28 lb.)
64-90 g/m2 (17-24 lb.)
Photo Tray
Plain, Inkjet, Glossy (cast/resin coated)
Lower Tray
N/A
Duplex
Plain
ADF
Plain
*1 User defined.
*2 US models only.
1-4
Confidential
1.3
Paper Handling
Model
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
Standard Tray
100 sheets (80 g/m
20 sheets
(thickness: 0.25 mm)
N/A
Photo Tray
Paper Input
(sheets)
Lower Tray
DCPJ925DW
2)
N/A
ADF
Base : 15 pages
Conditional : 20 pages*
N/A
Output Paper Capacity

(sheets)
50 (80 g/m2)
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
Standard Tray
MFCJ430W
100 sheets (80
Photo Tray
Paper Input
Lower
Tray
(sheets)
ADF
N/A
N/A
Base : 15 pages
N/A

(sheets)
Model
Standard Tray
Photo Tray
Paper Input
Lower Tray
(sheets)
ADF
(sheets)
MFCJ435W
g/m2)
50 (80 g/m2)
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
2
100 sheets (80 g/m )

20 sheets (thickness: 0.25 mm)
N/A
Base : 15 pages
50 (80 g/m2)
* Temperature: 68-78.8F (20-26C)

Humidity: 40-50% without condensation
Paper: BP60MP plain paper / Xerox4200 20 lb.
1-5
Confidential
1.4
LCD/Panel
Model
DCPJ525W
Size & Type
DCPJ725DW
DCPJ925DW
1.9" STN
3.3" TFT
LCD
Touch-Panel
3.3" TP
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
Size & Type
MFCJ430W
MFCJ435W
1.9" STN
LCD
Touch-Panel
Model
N/A
3.3" TP
MFCJ625DW
Size & Type
MFCJ825DW
1.9" STN
MFCJ835DW
3.3" TFT
LCD
Touch-Panel
1.5
3.3" TP
Memory
Model
Memory Capacity
(physical: megabytes)
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
40 MB
DCPJ925DW
64 MB
Memory Backup
(with battery, 24 hours)
N/A
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
Memory Capacity
40 MB
Memory Backup
N/A
Model
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
Memory Capacity
64 MB
Memory Backup
N/A
1-6
MFCJ435W
MFCJ835DW
Confidential
1.6
Interface
Model
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
Host Interface
DCPJ925DW
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed

N/A
LAN
Yes
Wireless LAN
Yes
Bluetooth
N/A
N/A
IrSimple
PictBridge
N/A
Yes
USB Flash Memory
N/A
Yes
Memory Stick/
Memory Stick Duo:
Memory Stick Pro:
Acceptable Media
(Type & Size) / Media Card
N/A
16-128 MB
256 MB - 16 GB
(MagicGate: YES if not use MG
function)
SD Memory Card:
16 MB - 2 GB
(miniSD, miroSD with adapter)
SDHC Memory Card: 4-32 GB
(miniSDHC, miroSDHC with adapter)
SDXC Memory Card: 48-64 GB
Multi Media Card:
32 MB - 2 GB
MultiMedia Card plus: 128 MB - 4 GB
MultiMedia Card mobile:64 MG - 1 GB (with adapter)
1-7
Confidential
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
Host Interface
MFCJ430W
LAN
N/A
Wireless LAN
Yes
Bluetooth
N/A
IrSimple
N/A
PictBridge
N/A
USB Flash Memory
N/A
Acceptable Media
N/A
Model
MFCJ625DW
Host Interface
LAN
MFCJ435W
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
USB 2.0 Hi-Speed

N/A
Yes
Wireless LAN
Yes
Bluetooth
N/A
IrSimple
N/A
PictBridge
Yes
USB Flash Memory
Yes
Memory Stick/
Memory Stick Duo:
Memory Stick Pro:
Acceptable Media
16-128 MB
256 MB - 16 GB
(MagicGate: YES if not use MG function)
SD Memory Card:
16 MB - 2 GB
(miniSD, miroSD with adapter)
SDHC Memory Card: 4-32 GB
(miniSDHC, miroSDHC with adapter)
SDXC Memory Card: 48-64 GB
Multi Media Card:
32 MB - 2 GB
MultiMedia Card plus: 128 MB - 4 GB
MultiMedia Card mobile:64 MG - 1 GB (with adapter)
1-8
Confidential
1.7
Others
Model
DCPJ525W
Operating Environment
Temperature (Best Print
Quality)
DCPJ725DW
10-35 (20-33) degrees centigrade
Humidity (Best Print Quality)
Power
Consumption*1
Approx.
(Copy Mode*2/
Ready Mode/
Sleep Mode/OFF)
20-80% (20-80%)
U.S.A.
19/5/1.5/0.2 W
Europe/
Asia/
Oceania
18/5/1.5/0.15 W
N/A
18/5.5/1.5/0.15 W
Sound Pressure Level

(Operating)
Machine Dimensions
Machine Weight
DCPJ925DW
24/6.5/2.5/0.15 W
50 dBA (Maximum)
405 mm (W)
378 mm (D)
160 mm (H)
405 mm (W)
378 mm (D)
180 mm (H)
8.7 kg (19.2 lb.)
9 kg (19.8 lb.)
9.3 kg (20.5 lb.)
*1 Measured when the machine is connected to a USB interface.

*2 The measuring conditions differ depending upon the model.
1-9
Confidential
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
Quality)
20-80% (20-80%)
U.S.A.
19/5.5/2/0.2 W
Europe/
Asia/
Oceania
N/A
19/5.5/2/0.15 W
Taiwan
N/A
19/5.5/2/0.2 W

(Operating)
Machine Dimensions
Machine Weight
50 dBA (Maximum)
405 mm (W)
378 mm (D)
160 mm (H)
409 mm (W)
375 mm (D)
180 mm (H)
8.7 kg (19.2 lb.)
Model
MFCJ625DW
Quality)
MFCJ835DW
20-80% (20-80%)
U.S.A.
19/5.5/2/0.2 W
23/6/2.5/0.2 W
Europe/
Asia/
Oceania
19/6/2/0.15 W
24/6.5/2.5/0.15 W
Taiwan
19/5.5/2/0.2 W
23/6/2.5/0.2 W
Machine Dimensions
409 mm (W)
375 mm (D)
180 mm (H)

(Operating)
Machine Weight
405 mm (W)
378 mm (D)
180 mm (H)
9 kg (19.8 lb.)
MFCJ825DW
Power
Consumption*1
Approx.
(Copy Mode*2/
Ready Mode/
Sleep Mode/OFF)
MFCJ435W
Power
Consumption*1
Approx.
(Copy Mode*2/
Ready Mode/
Sleep Mode/OFF)
MFCJ430W
50 dBA (Maximum)
405 mm (W)
378 mm (D)
180 mm (H)
9 kg (19.8 lb.)
409 mm (W)
375 mm (D)
180 mm (H)
9.3 kg (20.5 lb.)
*1 Measured when the machine is connected to a USB interface.

*2 The measuring conditions differ depending upon the model.
1-10
Confidential
TELEPHONE
Model
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
Handset
N/A
Digital Cordless Phone
N/A
DCPJ925DW
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
Handset
N/A
N/A
Model
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
Handset
N/A
N/A
1-11
MFCJ435W
MFCJ835DW
Confidential
FAX
Model
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
Modem Speed
N/A
Transmission Speed
N/A
ITU-T Group
N/A
Document
(Send/Receive)
N/A
Memory
(Send/Receive)
N/A
DCPJ925DW
Color FAX
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
Modem Speed
MFCJ430W
MFCJ435W
14,400 bps (FAX)
Transmission Speed
Approx. 7 seconds (ITU-T Test Chart #1, MMR)
ITU-T Group
G3
Document
(Send/Receive)
Yes/Yes (ITU-T color FAX)
Memory
(Send/Receive)
No/Yes (ITU-T color FAX)
Color FAX
Model
Modem Speed
Transmission Speed
ITU-T Group
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
14,400 bps (FAX)
33,600 bps (FAX)
Approx. 7 seconds
(ITU-T Test Chart #1,
MMR)
Approx. 3 seconds
(ITU-T Test Chart #1, MMR)
G3
Super G3
Document
(Send/Receive)
Yes/Yes (ITU-T color FAX)
Memory
(Send/Receive)
No/Yes (ITU-T color FAX)
Color FAX
1-12
Confidential
PRINTER
Model
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
DCPJ925DW
Print Speed ESAT

(based on ISO/IEC 24734)
10 / 8.0 ipm
12 / 10 ipm
Draft Print Speed (mono/color)

*time calculated including
paper feeding
33 / 26 ppm
35 / 27 ppm
Resolution
(horizontal x vertical)
Auto Duplex Print
Up to 1200 x 6000 dpi

N/A
Yes
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
Print Speed ESAT

10 / 8.0 ipm

paper feeding
33 / 26 ppm
Resolution
Up to 1200 x 6000 dpi

N/A
Auto Duplex Print
Model
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
Print Speed ESAT

paper feeding
Resolution
Auto Duplex Print
MFCJ435W
MFCJ835DW
12 / 10 ipm
33 / 26 ppm
35 / 27 ppm
Up to 1200 x 6000 dpi

Yes
1-13
Confidential
COPY
Model
DCPJ525W
Copy Speed ESAT

*This spec is for ADF model
only
Draft Copy Speed (A4/LTR)
paper feeding
**EU's default is calculated by
"normal mode" speed
Resolution
(horizontal x
vertical)
DCPJ725DW
DCPJ925DW
N/A
6.0 / 6.0 ipm (600 x 600 dpi)
22 / 20 cpm
23 / 20 cpm
Mono
Print: Maximum 1200 x 1200 dpi

Scan: Maximum 1200 x 1200 dpi
Color

N/A
Duplex Copy
Yes
Model
Copy Speed ESAT
only
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
N/A
22 / 20 cpm
Mono

Color

Duplex Copy
N/A
Model
Copy Speed ESAT
only
paper feeding
"normal mode" speed
Resolution
(horizontal x
vertical)
Duplex Copy
MFCJ435W
5.0 / 5.0 ipm (600 x 600 dpi)

paper feeding
"normal mode" speed
Resolution
(horizontal x
vertical)
MFCJ430W
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
6.0 / 6.0 ipm (600 x 600 dpi)
23 / 20 cpm
Mono

Color

Yes
1-14
Confidential
SCANNER
Model
Scan Speed
(Mono/Color) *@100 dpi
Resolution
(horizontal x
vertical)
DCPJ525W
DCPJ925DW
A4: 3.37 seconds / 4.83 seconds

LTR: 3.17 seconds / 4.54 seconds
A4:
3.37 seconds / 3.37 seconds
LTR:
3.17 seconds / 3.17 seconds
FB: 1200 x 2400 dpi

ADF: 1200 x 600 dpi
FB: 2400 x 2400 dpi

ADF: 2400 x 1200 dpi
Optical
Interpolated
DCPJ725DW
For XP/Vista/Windows 7, up to 19200x19200 dpi with Scanner Utility
Model
MFCJ280W
Scan Speed
Resolution
(horizontal x
vertical)
Interpolated
MFCJ430W
FB: 1200 x 2400 dpi

ADF: 1200 x 600 dpi
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
A4: 3.37 seconds /

4.83 seconds
LTR: 3.17 seconds /
4.54 seconds

Optical
FB: 1200 x 2400 dpi

ADF: 1200 x 600 dpi
FB: 2400 x 2400 dpi

ADF: 2400 x 1200 dpi
Interpolated
Scan Speed
MFCJ435W

Optical
Model
Resolution
(horizontal x
vertical)
MFCJ425W
1-15
Confidential
SOFTWARE
Model
Support OS
Version
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
DCPJ925DW
Windows
2000/XP/XP Professional x64/Vista/7

Server 2003/2003 x64/2003 R2/2003 R2 x64/2008/2008 R2
Macintosh
Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.x, 10.6.x
Model
Support OS
Version
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
Windows

Server 2003/2003 x64/2003 R2/2003 R2 x64/2008/2008 R2
Macintosh
Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.x, 10.6.x
Model
Support OS
Version
MFCJ280W
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
Windows

Server 2003/2003 x64/2003 R2/2003 R2 x64/2008/2008 R2
Macintosh
Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5.x, 10.6.x
1-16
MFCJ435W
Confidential
NETWORK
8.1
Network
Model
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
Internet FAX (Firmware)
DCPJ925DW
N/A
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
N/A
Model
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
8.2
MFCJ435W
MFCJ835DW
N/A
Wired
Model
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
DCPJ925DW
Model Name (Ethernet)
N/A
Embedded (NC-250h)
Network Connection (Ethernet)
N/A
Ethernet 10/100BASE-TX
Auto Negotiation
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
N/A
N/A
Model
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
N/A
Embedded
(NC-250h)
N/A
Ethernet 10/100BASE-TX
Auto Negotiation
1-17
MFCJ435W
Confidential
8.3
Wireless
Model
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
Model Name (Wireless)
DCPJ925DW
Embedded (NC-260w)
Network Connection
(Wireless)
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Wireless Security
SSID (32 chr), WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP: AES), WPA2-PSK (AES)
**NO LEAP**
WiFi Certification
WiFi b, g and n
WCN
(Windows Connect Now)
N/A
AOSS
Yes
Setup Support WPS (WiFi

Utility
Protected
Setup)
Yes
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
MFCJ435W
Embedded (NC-260w)
Network Connection
(Wireless)
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Wireless Security
SSID (32 chr), WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP: AES), WPA2-PSK (AES)
**NO LEAP**
WiFi Certification
WiFi b, g and n
WCN
N/A
AOSS
Yes

Utility
Protected
Setup)
Model
Network Connection
(Wireless)
Yes
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
Embedded (NC-260w)
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
Wireless Security
SSID (32 chr), WEP 64/128 bit, WPA-PSK (TKIP: AES), WPA2-PSK
(AES)
**NO LEAP**
WiFi Certification
WiFi b, g and n
WCN
AOSS
Utility
Protected
Setup)
N/A
Yes
Yes
1-18
Confidential
SUPPLIES/OPTIONS
Model
Ink
Cartridge
Yield
(@ISO
pattern/
normal)
DCPJ525W
Bundled Cartridges
DCPJ725DW
DCPJ925DW
Approx. 80% of supply standard cartridges
Supply Standard
Cartridges
BK: 300 pages

CL: 300 pages
Supply High Yield

Cartridges
BK: 600 pages

CL: 600 pages
Model
Ink
Cartridge
Yield
(@ISO
pattern/
normal)
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
BK: 300 pages

CL: 300 pages
Supply High Yield

Cartridges
BK: 600 pages

CL: 600 pages
Bundled Cartridges
MFCJ435W
Supply Standard
Cartridges
Model
Ink
Cartridge
Yield
(@ISO
pattern/
normal)
MFCJ280W
Bundled Cartridges
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
Supply Standard
Cartridges
BK: 300 pages

CL: 300 pages
Supply High Yield

Cartridges
BK: 600 pages

CL: 600 pages
1-19
Confidential
10
SERVICE INFORMATION
Model
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725DW
Monthly Volume
DCPJ925DW
2500 pages
Machine Life
30000 pages or 5 years
Parts Life
(Document scanner unit)
30000 pages (Total in flat-bed and ADF scanning)
MTBF (Mean Time Between

Failures)
4000 hours
MTTR (Mean Time To Be

Repaired)
30 minutes
Model
MFCJ280W
MFCJ425W
Monthly Volume
MFCJ430W
Machine Life
Parts Life

Failures)
4000 hours

Repaired)
30 minutes
Model
Monthly Volume
Machine Life
Parts Life
MFCJ435W
2500 pages
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
2500 pages

Failures)
4000 hours

Repaired)
30 minutes
1-20
Confidential
11
PAPER
11.1 Paper Specifications

Paper type and size for each operation
Paper Type
Paper Size
Cut Sheet
Cards
Envelopes
Transparencies
Usage
Fax
Copy
Photo
Capture
Printer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
User
defined
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
User
defined
User
defined
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Letter
A4
Legal
Executive
JIS B5
215.9 x 279.4 mm (8 1/2 x 11 inches)

210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 inches)
215.9 x 355.6 mm (8 1/2 x 14 inches)
184 x 267 mm (7 1/4 x 10 1/2 inches)
182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches)
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--
Yes
Yes
----
A5
A6
Photo
Photo L
Photo 2L
Index Card
Postcard 1
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches)

105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches)
10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 inches)
89 x 127 mm (3 1/2 x 5 inches)
13 x 18 cm (5 x 7 inches)
127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 inches)
100 x 148 mm (3.9 x 5.8 inches)
--------
Yes
-Yes
-----
--Yes
-Yes
---
Postcard 2
(Double)
C5 Envelope
DL Envelope
COM-10
Monarch
Y4 Envelope
Letter
A4
Legal
A5
148 x 200 mm (5.8 x 7.9 inches)
--
--
--
162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9 inches)

110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 inches)
105 x 241 mm (4 1/8 x 9 1/2 inches)
98 x 191 mm (3 7/8 x 7 1/2 inches)
105 x 235 mm (4.1 x 9.3 inches)
215.9 x 279.4 mm (8 1/2 x 11 inches)
210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 inches)
215.9 x 355.6 mm (8 1/2 x 14 inches)
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches)
----------
-----Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
----------
Paper weight, thickness and capacity

Paper Type
Cut Sheet
Cards
Weight
Thickness
3 to 6 mil (0.08 to 0.15 mm)
No. of
sheets
100 *1
3 to 10 mil (0.08 to 0.25 mm)
20 *2
Up to 58 lb. (Up to 220 g/m2)
Up to 10 mil (Up to 0.25 mm)
20 *2
g/m 2)
20
30
Plain Paper
17 to 32 lb. (64 to 120 g/m2)
Inkjet Paper
17 to 53 lb. (64 to 200
g/m2)
Glossy Paper
Photo 4 x 6 inches
Index Card
Up to 58 lb. (Up to 220
Up to 32 lb. (Up to 120 g/m
Envelopes
20 to 25 lb. (75 to 95 g/m
Transparencies
--
2)
2)
10
--
10
*1
Up to 100 sheets of plain paper 20 lb. (80 g/m2).

*2 BP71 69 lb. (260 g/m2) paper is especially designed for Brother inkjet machines.
1-21
Confidential
Recommended print media

To get the best print quality, we suggest using Brother paper. (See the table below.)
We recommend using "3M Transparency Film" when you print on transparencies.
Paper Type
Premium Plus Glossy Photo
- Letter
- 4 x 6 inches
Premium Glossy Photo
- Letter
- 4 x 6 inches
Matte Inkjet (Letter)
Plain Inkjet
- Letter
A4 Plain
A4 Glossy Photo
A4 Inkjet (Matte)
10 x 15 cm Glossy Photo
Item
BP71GLTR
BP71GP
BP61GLL (USA only)
BP61GLP (USA only)
BP60ML (USA only)
BP60PL100 (USA only)
BP60PA
BP71GA4
BP60MA
BP71GP
Handling and using print media

Store paper in its original packaging, and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from
moisture, direct sunlight and heat.
Avoid touching the shiny (coated) side of photo paper. Load photo paper with the shiny side
facing down.
Avoid touching either side of transparencies because they absorb water and perspiration
easily, and this may cause decreased output quality. Transparencies designed for laser
printers/copiers may stain your next document. Use only transparencies recommended for
inkjet printing.
You can only print on both sides of the paper with PC printing using Windows.
1-22
Confidential
1 0.08 inches (2 mm) or greater curve

may cause jams to occur
1-23
Confidential
11.2 Printable Area

The printable area depends on the settings in the application you are using. The figures below
show the unprintable areas on cut sheet paper and envelopes. The machine can print in the
shaded areas of cut sheet paper only when the Borderless print feature is available and turned
on.
Cut Sheet
Envelopes
Top (1)
3 mm (0.12 inches)
22 mm (0.86 inches)
Bottom (2)
3 mm (0.12 inches)
22 mm (0.86 inches)
1-24
Left (3)
3 mm (0.12 inches)
3 mm (0.12 inches)
Right (4)
3 mm (0.12 inches)
3 mm (0.12 inches)
Confidential
CHAPTER 2 ERROR INDICATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING
INTRODUCTION
This section gives the service personnel some of the troubleshooting procedures to be followed
if an error or malfunction occurs with the machine. It is impossible to anticipate all of the
possible problems which may occur in future and determine the troubleshooting procedures, so
this section covers some sample problems. However, those samples will help service personnel
pinpoint and repair other defective elements if he/she analyzes and examines them well.
1.1
Precautions
Be sure to observe the following to prevent any secondary troubles from happening during
troubleshooting.
WARNING
DO NOT use flammable substances or organic solvent such as alcohol, benzine, thinner or
any type of spray to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this may cause a fire or
electrical shock.
Always unplug the AC power cord from the outlet when removing the covers and PCBs,
adjusting the mechanisms, or conducting continuity testing with a circuit tester.
(1) When disconnecting the connectors, do not pull the lead wires but hold the connector
housings.
(2) Static electricity charged in your body may damage electronic parts.
Before handling the PCBs, touch a metal portion of the machine to discharge static
electricity charged in your body. When transporting PCBs, be sure to wrap them in
conductive sheets.
When replacing the PCBs, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job on a static
mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
(3) Be sure to observe the warnings.
(4) After repairing the defective section, be sure to check again if the repaired section works
correctly.
2-1
Confidential
1.2
Initial Check
Prior to proceeding to the troubleshooting procedures, make the following initial checks:
Environmental conditions
Check that:
(1) The machine is placed on a flat, firm surface.
(2) The machine is used in a clean environment at or near normal room temperature (10C to
35C) with normal relative humidity (20 to 80%).
(3) The machine is not exposed to direct sunlight, excessive heat, moisture, or dust.
Power requirements
Check that:
(1) The power supply specified on the rating plate on the machine is used. The supply voltage
stays within the rating 10%.
(2) All cables and harnesses are firmly connected.
(3) The fuses are not blown.
Recording paper
Check that:
(1) A recommended type of recording paper is used. (Refer to Chapter 1, Section 11
"PAPER.")
(2) The recording paper is not dampened.
Ink cartridges
(1) Check that all of four ink cartridges are loaded.
Head/carriage unit
(1) Repeat the purge operation (Function code 76) several times. (Refer to Chapter 5, Section
1.4.28.)
2-2
Confidential
OVERVIEW
2.1
Cross-section Drawings and Components
Document scanning and feeding mechanisms

Document scanning
position actuator
Document feed roller 1

ADF separation pad
Document feed
roller 2
Document pick-up roller
(Left)
(Right)
Document detection actuator

Document separation roller
CIS unit
Document pressure bar
Printing and paper feeding mechanisms

Paper ejection roller
Switchback roller
Paper feed roller

Pressure roller
Pressure roller release
actuator
Registration actuator
Head/carriage
unit
(Front)
(Rear)
Platen
Bank ASSY
DX roller
2-3
Paper pull-in rollers
Confidential
2.2
Paper Path for Documents and Recording Paper
Document path in ADF scanning

Document path
in ADF scanning
Place a document face down.
(Right)
(Left)
Recording paper path
Paper path in disc printing
(Front)
(Rear)
Paper path in duplex printing
Paper path from paper tray
2-4
Confidential
2.3
Parts Names and Functions
Document scanning and feeding

Names
Functions
This detects whether documents are set on the document tray.
This pulls documents loaded in the document tray into the ADF.
Document separation roller and

separation rubber
These feed document pages (drawn in by the document pick-up

roller) one at a time to the document feed roller 1.
This feeds a document to the scanning start position. It also ejects

the scanned document onto the document cover.
Document scanning position

actuator
This detects the leading edge of document pages, indicating the

scanning start position.
This also detects paper jams in the ADF.
This feeds the scanned document to the document feed roller 1.
Printing and paper feeding

Names
Functions
Paper pull-in rollers
These rollers pull in recording paper from the paper tray.
Registration actuator
This detects the leading and trailing edges of recording paper for
indicating the printing start position and for judging the paper size,
respectively.
This also detects paper jams in the rear section of the machine.
Paper feed roller
This stops its rotation so that the leading edge of recording paper
comes into contact with the roller for alignment (registration).
After registration, this roller rotates to feed the recording paper to
the printing start position.
In disc printing, this roller feeds the disc tray.
Pressure roller release actuator
In disc printing or in printing on glossy paper, this detects whether

the pressure roller is released.
Paper ejection roller
This feeds printed recording paper to the switchback roller.

In disc printing, this roller feeds and ejects the disc tray.
Switchback roller
This ejects recording paper to the paper ejection tray.

In duplex printing, after feeding recording paper printed on its first
side by the specified amount, this roller reverses to feed the paper to
the DX chute.
DX roller
In duplex printing, this roller feeds recording paper passing through

the DX chute, to the paper feed roller.
2-5
Confidential
2.4
Block Diagram
Control panel ASSY
Carriage motor
Document scanner unit
Touch panel *1
Panel PCB
ADF unit *2
Document detection sensor PCB
CIS unit
Key matrix
Head/carriage unit
Document scanner
open sensor
Touch panel PCB *1
Document scanner
motor
ADF motor *2
LCD unit
Carriage PCB
Document scanning position sensor PCB
CR encoder sensor
USB
Paper width sensor
Main PCB
Head thermistor
PC
Network *3
LAN
PF encoder sensor PCB

Registration sensor PCB
Ink refill unit
Main
ASIC
Paper feed motor
Ink cartridge PCB
Pressure roller release sensor PCB
Ink cartridge detection sensors
ASF drive ASSY
Casing internal temperature thermistor
Modem
ASF motor/encoder PCB

ASF encoder sensor
Ink remaining sensor PCB
ASF motor
Maintenance unit
Purge cam switch
High-yield ink cartridge sensor PCB
Media *7
MS/MS duo/SD
SDAA *4
PB/USB Flash memory *6
PS/MJ shield unit

Disc guide sensor ASSY *8
Speaker *5
Wireless LAN PCB
MJ PCB *4
Line *4
External line *4
Ink cartridge cover sensor

Power supply PCB
Power cord
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
For models with touch panel

For models with ADF
For wired LAN-enabled models
For MFC only
For models with speaker
For models supporting PictBridge/USB flash memory drive
For models with Photo Capture Center
For disc printing models
2-6
Confidential
2.5
Components
*1 For models with ADF
*2 For models without ADF
*3 For models with speaker
*4 For disc printing models
ADF & document cover ASSY *1

Document cover ASSY *2
Control panel ASSY

with touch panel

Speaker spring *3
Speaker
Harness cover
Scanner cover support
Control panel ASSY

without touch panel
*3
CIS flat cable cover
Jam clear cover
Harness
spacer
Upper cover
Head/carriage unit

sensor harness
sensor PCB ASSY
Maintenance unit +
ASF drive ASSY
Engine unit
Ink refill ASSY
Disc guide and
Registration sensor
its cover *4
PCB ASSY
PF encoder sensor
PCB ASSY
Ink absorber box

Disc guide sensor
ASSY *4
Main PCB ASSY
Flushing box
Ink cartridge cover sensor ASSY
PF/registration
sensor harness ASSY
Lower cover
Ink cartridge cover
MJ PCB ASSY
Media module cover
Power supply PCB
ASSY
Front cover
Wireless LAN
PCB
Lower PS/MJ shield

Paper tray
(mini11_COMPONENTS)
2-7
Confidential
ERROR INDICATION
To help the user or the service personnel promptly locate the cause of a problem (if any), the
machine incorporates the self-diagnostic functions which display error messages for equipment
errors.
3.1
Error Codes
Error
Code
Contents
Refer to
page:
0E
In duplex printing, a sensor error has occurred during printing on the second
side. (During switchbacking, the registration sensor outputs an unexpected
signal.)
2-21
17
Recording paper size error. (Duplex PC print/Duplex copy) (Detected by the

paper width sensor or registration sensor)
2-22
18
In switchbacking of paper for printing on the second side, a recording paper jam
has occurred. (The registration sensor does not come ON within the specified
paper feeding amount.)
2-22
20
Cannot identify a black ink cartridge.
2-23
21
Cannot identify a yellow ink cartridge.
2-23
22
Cannot identify a cyan ink cartridge.
2-23
23
Cannot identify a magenta ink cartridge.
2-23
24
An ink cartridge of wrong color is loaded. (A color ink cartridge is loaded in the
black ink cartridge slot.)
2-24
26
The service life of the black ink cartridge will be expired soon. (Detected by the
black ink remaining sensor)
2-25
27
The service life of the yellow ink cartridge will be expired soon. (Detected by
the yellow ink remaining sensor)
2-25
28
The service life of the cyan ink cartridge will be expired soon. (Detected by the
cyan ink remaining sensor)
2-25
29
The service life of the magenta ink cartridge will be expired soon. (Detected by
the magenta ink remaining sensor)
2-25
2A
No black ink cartridge loaded. (Detected by the ink cartridge detection sensor)
2-26
2B
No yellow ink cartridge loaded. (Detected by the ink cartridge detection sensor)
2-26
2C
No cyan ink cartridge loaded. (Detected by the ink cartridge detection sensor)
2-26
2D
No magenta ink cartridge loaded. (Detected by the ink cartridge detection

sensor)
2-26
2F
Ink cartridge cover opened.
2-27
2-8
Confidential
Error
Code
Contents
Refer to
page:
30
Carriage does not move. (Detected by the CR encoder sensor)
2-28
31
Cannot detect the origin of the carriage. (Detected by the CR encoder sensor)
2-29
32
Capping load large.
2-29
35
Abnormal stop of head/carriage unit. (Error caused by any problem except a

paper jam when the print head is not jetting out ink)
2-30
38
Abnormal stop of head/carriage unit during printing. (Error caused by a paper

jam when the print head is not jetting out ink)
2-30
3B
Abnormal stop of head/carriage unit during printing. (Error caused by any

problem except a paper jam when the print head is jetting out ink).
2-31
3C
Abnormal stop of head/carriage unit during printing. (Error caused by a paper

jam when the print head is jetting out ink)
2-31
3E
Any abnormality in the carriage motor, ASF motor, or paper feed motor.
2-32
3F
Carriage does not stop.
2-32
40
Casing internal thermistor defective. (Detects -20C or below or 80C or higher)
2-33
42
Head drive voltage dropped below the lower limit.
2-33
43
Head thermistor defective. (Detects -20C or below or 80C or higher when the
power is turned on)
2-33
44
Abnormal temperature of the print head driver.
2-34
46
Purge counter or flushing counter overflown.
2-34
48
Head flexible cable halfway inserted.
2-34
49
Abnormal head drive voltage. (Does not rise to the specified level)
2-35
4F
The head drive voltage has dropped from the high to low level in an abnormally
short period.
2-35
50
Purge cam switch does not come ON.
2-35
52
Failed to detect the origin of the purge cam. (Failed to detect the longest OFF
domain of the purge cam)
2-36
5A
Abnormal stop of purge cam being driven.
2-37
5B
Abnormal stop of pump in the maintenance unit.
2-37
5D
Driver IC overcurrent protection activated when the purge cam was being
driven.
2-38
5E
Driver IC overcurrent protection activated when the pump was in operation.
2-38
6C
Driver IC overcurrent protection activated during running of the ASF motor.
2-39
6F
ASF motor does not stop. (Keeps rotating for 15 seconds or more)
2-40
75
Head capping failed.
2-40
76
Head uncapping failed.
2-41
2-9
Confidential
Error
Code
Contents
Refer to
page:
7A
Abnormal stop of purge cam during head capping. (When being driven in the
capping direction)
2-41
7B
Abnormal stop of purge cam during head uncapping. (When being driven in the
uncapping direction)
2-41
7D
Motor driver IC overcurrent protection activated when the purge cam was being
driven.
2-42
7E
Head property data not entered.
2-42
80
Recording paper size error. (During fax/list printing) (The paper size not
suitable for recording fax was detected by the paper width sensor or registration
sensor.)
2-43
81
Recording paper size error. (Except during fax/list printing) (The paper width
sensor has detected that the paper width is less than the specified one.)
2-44
82
Recording paper jam in paper feeding. (The paper width sensor has failed to
detect the leading edge of paper.)
2-44
84
Recording paper jam in paper ejecting. (The registration sensor sticks to ON

even after completion of paper ejection.)
2-45
89
Paper width sensor has failed to detect the origin defined on the paper feed
roller.
2-45
8A
PF encoder sensor cannot detect the rotation of the paper feed roller.
2-46
8B
PF encoder sensor detects an abnormal stop of the paper feed roller.
2-46
8C
Driver IC overcurrent protection activated during running of the paper feed

motor.
2-47
8F
Paper feed motor cannot stop.
2-47
90
Disc tray collided against an obstacle in the rear of the machine.
2-48
91
Pressure roller has failed to be released.
2-48
92
Pressure roller has failed to be depressed.
2-49
93
Disc size error. Or no disc is loaded on the disc tray.
2-49
A1
Document scanner unit opened.
2-50
A2
During ADF scanning, a document of 90 cm or longer is detected.
2-50
A3
During ADF scanning, the document scanning position sensor does not come
ON.
2-51
A5
Detected abnormal level data in the CIS scanning result during fax sending (1st
time).
2-51
A6
Detected abnormal level data in the CIS scanning result during fax sending
(retry).
2-51
A7
Mismatch between actual CIS type and EEPROM data.
2-52
A8
Color parameter matching error. (Used for debugging at the factory.)
2-52
AF
CIS positioning error. (Home positioning failed)
2-53
2-10
Confidential
Error
Code
Contents
Refer to
page:
BD
Black level data error in scanning.
2-53
DF
SDAA failure.
2-54
E0
Cannot start up the modem normally even after resetting it.
2-54
E2
Wired LAN MAC address not registered.
2-54
E3
Failed to get a wireless LAN MAC address.
2-54
E6
EEPROM write error.
2-55
EA
Document removed at phase B. (Detected by the document detection sensor)
2-55
EC
LCD connection failure.
2-55
ED
Touch panel initialization failed
2-56
F0
Flash file system error.
2-56
FE
ROM data acquisition error.
2-56
2-11
Confidential
3.2
Error Messages
Error Message
B&W Print Only
Replace Ink
Error Code
Contents
Refer to:
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.8
One or more of the color ink cartridges have

reached the end of their life.
Replace the color ink cartridge(s).
BT Call Sign On
(U.K. only)
BT Call Sign is set to ON, so the Receive

Mode cannot be changed.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.9.5
Cannot Detect
Cannot detect an ink cartridge correctly.
20, 21, 22, 23

24
p. 2-23
p. 2-24
Cannot Print
Replace Ink
The service life of any ink cartridge has

expired.
26, 27, 28, 29
p. 2-25
Check for a Printable

Disc
Disc size error. Or no disc is loaded on the disc

tray.
93
p. 2-49
Comm.Error
Fax communication error.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.9
Connection Fail
Failed to connect to the other end during FAX

sending or receiving.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.9
Cover is Open
Any cover is opened.
2F
A1
p. 2-27
p. 2-50
Data Remaining
Memory full so that data processing is

impossible.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.5
Disc Guide is Open
Disc guide opened.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.9
Disc Jam [Front]
Disc tray jammed (in the front of the machine).
Disc Jam [Rear]
Disc tray jammed (in the rear of the machine).
31
38
3C
84
p. 2-29
p. 2-30
p. 2-31
p. 2-45
Disc Tray hits at the

back
Disc tray collided against an obstacle in the

rear of the machine.
90
p. 2-48
Disconnected
Remote FAX machine on the other end of the

communications line, stopped its operation.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.9
Document Jam/
Too long
Document jam or too long document in the

ADF.
A2
A3
EA
p. 2-50
p. 2-51
p. 2-55
DR Mode in Use
The Distinctive Ringing mode is ON so that

the Receive Mode cannot be changed.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.9.5
High Temperature
The room temperature is high.
40
p. 2-33
Hub is Unusable.
A USB hub or a hub built-in USB device is

connected.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.3
2-12
Confidential
Error Message
Error Code
Contents
Refer to:
Image Too Long.
Image too long to correct or trim.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.4
Image Too Small.
Image too small to correct or trim.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.4
Ink Absorber Full
46
p. 2-34
Low Temperature
The room temperature is low.
40
p. 2-33
Media Error
The memory card or USB flash memory is

corrupted or improperly formatted.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.3
Media is Full.
The memory card or USB flash memory

loaded in the media slot is full or contains 999
or more files.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.5
No Caller ID
No caller ID information has been received.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.9.6
Disc Tray did not Feed
No disc tray loaded in the disc guide.
93
p. 2-49
No File
No printable files in the memory card or USB

flash memory drive.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.3
No Ink Cartridge
No ink cartridge is loaded.
2A, 2B, 2C,

2D
p. 2-26
No Paper Fed
No paper is loaded in the paper tray(s).
18
Chapter 2,
Section
4.2.1
No Response/Busy
The number dialed does not answer or is busy.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.9
Not Registered
Speed Dial number not registered.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.9.2
Out of Memory
The machines memory is full.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.5
Out of Fax Memory
Data stored in the memory by Memory Send/

Receive operation has exceeded the allowable
memory space.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.5
Paper Jam
Recording paper is jammed in the machine.
0E
18
31
38
3C
82
84
p. 2-21
p. 2-22
p. 2-29
p. 2-30
p. 2-31
p. 2-44
p. 2-45
2-13
Confidential
Error Message
Error Code
Contents
Refer to:
Touchscreen
initialization failed
The touch screen was pressed before

completion of power-on initialization.
ED
p. 2-56
Unusable Device
Disconnect device
from front connect or
& turn machine off &
then on
The connected USB device could be broken.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.3
Unusable Device
Please Disconnect
USB Device.
A USB device not supported by the machine is

connected.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.3
Wrong Ink Color
A color ink cartridge is loaded in the black ink

cartridge slot.
24
p. 2-24
Wrong Paper Size
Recording paper that differs from the setting in

size is loaded in the paper tray.
17
80
81
p. 2-22
p. 2-43
p. 2-44
2-14
Confidential
3.3
Communications Error Codes

Code 1
Code 2
Cause
10
08
Wrong number called.
11
01
No dial tone detected before start of dialing.
11
02
Busy tone detected before dialing.
11
03
2nd dial tone not detected.
11
05
No loop current detected.*1
11
06
Busy tone detected after dialing or called.
11
07
No response from the remote station in sending.
11
10
Unobtainable tone detected after dialing.
17
07
No response from the calling station in receiving.
20
01
Unable to detect a flag field.
20
02
Carrier was OFF for 200 milliseconds or longer.
20
03
Abort detected ("1" in succession for 7 bits or more).
20
04
Overrun detected.
20
05
A frame for 3 seconds or more received.
20
06
CRC error in answerback.
20
07
Echo command received.
20
08
Invalid command received.
20
09
Command ignored once for document setting or for

dumping-out at turn-around transmission.
20
0A
T5 time-out error.
20
0B
CRP received.
20
0C
EOR and NULL received.
Refer to:
Chapter 2, Section
4.9.4
*1 Available in German models only.
2-15
Confidential
Code 1
Code 2
Cause
Refer to:
32
01
Remote terminal only with V.29 capability in 2400 or

4800 bps transmission.
Chapter 2, Section
4.9.4
32
02
Remote terminal not ready for polling.
32
10
Remote terminal not equipped with password

function or its password switch OFF.
32
11
Remote terminal not equipped with or not ready for

confidential mailbox function.
32
12
Remote terminal not equipped with or not ready for

relay function.
32
13
No confidential mail in the remote terminal.
32
14
The available memory space of the remote terminal is

less than that required for reception of the
confidential or relay broadcasting instruction.
32
18
Remote terminal not equipped with color function.
40
02
Illegal coding system requested.
40
03
Illegal recording width requested.
40
05
ECM requested although not allowed.
40
06
Polled while not ready.
40
07
No document to send when polled.
40
10
Nation code or manufacturer code not coincident.
40
13
Polled by any other manufacturers' terminal while

waiting for secure polling.
40
17
Invalid resolution selected.
40
20
Invalid full-color mode requested.
50
01
Vertical resolution capability changed after

compensation of background color.
63
01
Password plus "lower 4 digits of telephone number"

not coincident.
63
02
Password not coincident.
63
03
Polling ID not coincident.
74
DCN received.
80
01
Fallback impossible.
90
01
Unable to detect video signals or commands within 6

seconds after CFR is transmitted.
90
02
Received PPS containing invalid page count or block

count.
2-16
Confidential
Code 1
Code 2
Cause
Refer to:
A0
03
Error correction sequence not terminated even at the

final transmission speed for fallback.
Chapter 2, Section
4.9.4
A0
11
Receive buffer empty. (5-second timeout)
A0
12
Receive buffer full during operation except receiving

into memory.
A0
13
Decoding error continued on 500 lines or more.
A0
14
Decoding error continued for 15 seconds or more.
A0
15
Timeout: 13 seconds or more for one-line

transmission.
A0
16
RTC not found or carrier OFF signal detected for 6

seconds.
A0
17
RTC found but no command detected for 60 seconds

or more.
A0
19
No image data to be sent.
A8
01
RTN, PIN or ERR received at the calling terminal.*1
A9
01
RTN, PIN or ERR received at the called terminal.*1
AA
18
Receive buffer full during receiving into memory.
B0
02
Unable to receive the next-page data.
B0
03
Unable to receive polling even during turn-around

transmission due to call reservation.
B0
04
PC interface error.
BF
01
Communication canceled by pressing the Stop/Exit

key before establishment of FAX communication*2.
BF
02
Communication canceled by pressing the Stop/Exit

key after establishment of FAX communication*2.
BF
03
Transmission canceled due to a scanning error caused

by no document or document feed problem in ADF
scanning in real time transmission.
*1 Available in German models only.

*2 Establishment of FAX communication
FAX communication is established when the calling station receives a DIS (reception capability) signal
from the called station and the called station receives an NSS or DCS (communications test) signal from
the calling station.
2-17
Confidential
Code 1
Code 2
Cause
C0
01
No common modulation mode or polling failed.
C0
02
Unable to detect JM.
C0
03
Unable to detect CM.
C0
04
Unable to detect CJ.
C0
10
V. 34 negotiation or training not finished.
C0
11
Modem error detected during V. 34 negotiation or

training.
C0
20
Modem error detected during sending of commands.
C0
21
Modem error detected during receiving of

commands.
C0
22
Control channel connection timeout.
C0
30
Modem error detected during sending of image

signals.
C0
31
Modem error detected during receiving of image

signals.
E0
01
Failed to detect 1300 Hz signal in burn-in operation.
E0
02
Failed to detect PB signals in burn-in operation.
FF
XX
Equipment error. (For X X, refer to Chapter 2,

Section 3.1 "Error Codes.")
2-18
Refer to:
Chapter 2, Section
4.9.4
Confidential
3.4
Status Monitor Errors

Error Message
Contents
Error Code
Cover is Open
Any cover opened.
Disc Guide is Open
Disc guide opened.
Document Jam
Document jam detected in the ADF.
A2
A3
EA
p. 2-50
p. 2-51
p. 2-55
High Temperature
The room temperature is high.
40
p. 2-33
Ink Absorber Full
Purge counter or flashing counter overflown.
46
p. 2-34
Ink low
The service life of any ink cartridge will be

expired soon.
Low Temperature
The room temperature is low.
40
p. 2-33
No Ink Cartridge
No ink cartridge loaded.
2A, 2B, 2C,

2D
p. 2-26
No Paper Fed
No paper loaded in paper tray.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.2.1
Offline
Machine offline.
Out of Memory
The memory is full.
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.4
Paper Jam
Recording paper jam.
0E
18
31
38
3C
82
84
p. 2-21
p. 2-22
p. 2-29
p. 2-30
p. 2-31
p. 2-44
p. 2-45
Printer Locked.
Printer function locked.
Replace Ink
The service life of any ink cartridge has

expired.
26, 27, 28,

29
p. 2-25
Unable to Print 3X
Errors around the head/carriage unit.
30 to 3F
pp. 2-28
to 2-32
Unable to Print 5X
Errors around the maintenance unit.
50 to 5E
pp. 2-35
to 2-38
75 to 7E
pp. 2-40
to 2-42
A2 to AF
pp. 2-50
to 2-53
Unable to Print 7X
Unable to Scan AX
Errors around the scanner.
2-19
2F
A1
Refer to:
p. 2-27
p. 2-50
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.9
Chapter 2,
Section
4.10.6
Confidential
Error Message
Contents
Error Code
Refer to:
Unable to Print XX
Errors other than 3X, 5X, 7X, and AX.
Codes other
than 3X,
5X, 7X and
AX
pp. 2-33
to 2-56
Wrong Paper Size
Recording paper that differs from the setting

in size is loaded in the paper tray.
In duplex printing, recording paper not
allowed for duplex printing is loaded.
17
80
81
p. 2-22
p. 2-43
p. 2-44
2-20
Confidential
TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1
Error Cause and Solutions

First see the user check items. If it cannot recover the machine, proceed to the troubleshooting
table exclusive to service personnel.
Error Code 0E
LCD
Paper Jam
In duplex printing, a sensor error has occurred during printing on the second side. (During
switchbacking, the registration sensor outputs an unexpected signal.)
User Check
- Remove the jammed paper.
- Check whether the recording paper being used is within the specification.
- Check that the recording paper is not curled..
Step
Cause
Solution
Registration actuator caught on

the surrounding parts
Check and reposition the registration actuator.
Registration sensor defective
Replace the registration sensor PCB ASSY.
Main PCB defective
Replace the main PCB ASSY.
2-21
Confidential
Error Code 17
Wrong Paper Size
LCD
Recording paper size error. (Duplex PC print/Duplex copy) (Detected by the paper width sensor
or registration sensor)
User Check
- Check that dark recording paper is not used.
Step
Cause
Solution

CR encoder strip stained
Replace the CR encoder strip.
PF encoder disc stained
Replace the PF encoder disc and clean the flushing

guide. Refer to Chapter 3, Section 1.
Paper feed motor defective
Replace the paper feed motor ASSY.
Paper width sensor defective
Replace the carriage PCB ASSY.
Main PCB defective
Error Code 18
LCD
Paper Jam
In switchbacking of paper for printing on the second side, a recording paper jam has occurred.
(The registration sensor does not come ON within the specified paper feeding amount.)
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution
Foreign materials in the duplex

print paper path
Remove foreign materials.

Main PCB defective
2-22
Confidential
Error Code 20
Cannot Detect
LCD
Cannot identify a black ink cartridge.

Error Code 21
Cannot Detect
LCD
Cannot identify a yellow ink cartridge.

Error Code 22
Cannot Detect
LCD
Cannot identify a cyan ink cartridge.

Error Code 23
Cannot Detect
LCD
Cannot identify a magenta ink cartridge.
User Check
- Reload the ink cartridge.
- Replace the ink cartridge.
Step
Cause
Solution
Connection failure of flat cables

related to the ink refill ASSY
Check the connection and reconnect the flat cables.
Ink cartridge detection sensor

defective
Replace the ink cartridge detection sensor PCB

ASSY.
Ink remaining sensor or highyield ink cartridge sensor

defective
Replace the ink refill ASSY.
Main PCB defective
2-23
Confidential
Error Code 24
Wrong Color INK
LCD
An ink cartridge of wrong color is loaded. (A color ink cartridge is loaded in the black ink
cartridge slot.)
User Check
- Load the ink cartridge into the correct slot.
Step
Cause
Solution

defective

ASSY.
Ink remaining sensor or highyield ink cartdige sensor defective
Main PCB defective
2-24
Confidential
Error Code 26
Ink Low Black
LCD
The service life of the black ink cartridge will be expired soon. (Detected by the black ink
remaining sensor)
Error Code 27
Ink Low Yellow
LCD
The service life of the yellow ink cartridge will be expired soon. (Detected by the yellow ink
remaining sensor)
Error Code 28
Ink Low Cyan
LCD
The service life of the cyan ink cartridge will be expired soon. (Detected by the cyan ink
remaining sensor)
Error Code 29
Ink Low Magenta
LCD
The service life of the magenta ink cartridge will be expired soon. (Detected by the magenta ink
remaining sensor)
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution
Ink remaining sensor defective
Main PCB defective
2-25
Confidential
Error Code 2A
No Ink Cartridge Black
LCD
No black ink cartridge loaded. (Detected by the ink cartridge detection sensor)
Error Code 2B
No Ink Cartridge Yellow
LCD
No yellow ink cartridge loaded. (Detected by the ink cartridge detection sensor)
Error Code 2C
No Ink Cartridge Cyan
LCD
No cyan ink cartridge loaded. (Detected by the ink cartridge detection sensor)
Error Code 2D
No Ink Cartridge Magenta
LCD
No magenta ink cartridge loaded. (Detected by the ink cartridge detection sensor)
User Check
- Reload the ink cartridge.
Step
Cause
Solution

defective

ASSY.
Main PCB defective
2-26
Confidential
Error Code 2F
Cover is Open / Close Ink Cover
LCD
Ink cartridge cover opened.

User Check
- Close the ink cartridge cover.
Step
Cause
Solution
Broken boss on the ink cartridge

cover, working as an actuator for
the ink cartridge cover sensor
Replace the ink cartridge cover.
Connection failure of the ink

cartridge cover sensor harness
Check the connection and reconnect the harness.
Ink cartridge cover sensor failure
Replace the ink cartridge cover sensor ASSY.
Main PCB defective
2-27
Confidential
Error Code 30
Unable to Print 30
LCD
Carriage does not move. (Detected by the CR encoder sensor)

User Check
Step
Cause
Solution
CR timing belt or pulley out of

place
Set the CR timing belt or the pulley into place.
Foreign materials on the CR

timing belt or around the head/
carriage unit
Leveler roller (LR) ASSY not

mounted correctly on the head/
carriage unit
Set the LR ASSY into place, using the LR jigs (LR

positioning jig and LR fitting jig).
CR encoder strip out of place
Set the CR encoder strip into place.
Carriage motor harness

connection failure
CR encoder sensor failure
Carriage motor defective
Replace the carriage motor.
Main PCB defective
2-28
Confidential
Error Code 31
Paper Jam / Disc Jam
LCD
Cannot detect the origin of the carriage. (Detected by the CR encoder sensor)
User Check
- Remove foreign materials.
Step
Cause
Solution

carriage unit
Switching lever guide out of place
Reposition the switching lever guide.
Switching lever guide defective
Replace the switching lever guide.
Maintenance unit defective
Clean the maintenance unit or replace it.
Main PCB defective
Error Code 32
Unable to Clean 32
LCD
Capping load large.

User Check
Step
Cause
Solution

carriage unit

2-29
Confidential
Error Code 35
Unable to Print 35
LCD
Abnormal stop of head/carriage unit. (Error caused by any problem except a paper jam when
the print head is not jetting out ink)
Step
Cause
Solution

carriage unit

carriage unit

Error Code 38
LCD
Abnormal stop of head/carriage unit during printing. (Error caused by a paper jam when the
print head is not jetting out ink)
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution
Foreign materials in the recording

paper path or around the head/
carriage unit
2-30
Confidential
Error Code 3B
Unable to Print 3B
LCD
Abnormal stop of head/carriage unit during printing. (Error caused by any problem except a
paper jam when the print head is jetting out ink).
Step
Cause
Solution

carriage unit

carriage unit

Error Code 3C
LCD
Abnormal stop of head/carriage unit during printing. (Error caused by a paper jam when the
print head is jetting out ink)
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution

paper path or around the head/
carriage unit

carriage unit

2-31
Confidential
Error Code 3E
Unable to Print 3E
LCD
Any abnormality in the carriage motor, ASF motor, or paper feed motor.
Step
Cause
Solution

paper path
Foreign materials in the

maintenance unit
Foreign materials on the CR guide

rail
Replace the maintenance unit.
Engine unit defective
Replace the engine unit.
Main PCB defective
Error Code 3F
Unable to Print 3F
LCD
Carriage does not stop.

Step
Cause
Solution

connection failure
CR encoder strip out of place
Set the CR encoder strip into place.
Main PCB defective
2-32
Confidential
Error Code 40
Unable to Init. 40
LCD
Casing internal thermistor defective. (Detects -20C or below or 80C or higher)

Step
Cause
Solution
Casing internal temperature

thermistor defective
Main PCB defective
Error Code 42
Unable to Print 42
LCD
Head drive voltage dropped below the lower limit.

User Check
- This error may occur when the ambient temperature is low. Increase the ambient temperature for
use of the machine.
Step
Cause
Solution
Connection failure of the head

flexible cable or carriage flat
cables
Check the connection and reconnect the

corresponding cable(s).
Print head defective
Replace the head/carriage unit.
Power supply PCB defective
Replace the power supply PCB ASSY.
Main PCB defective
Error Code 43
Unable to Print 43
LCD
Head thermistor defective. (Detects -20C or below or 80C or higher when the power is turned
on)
Step
Cause
Solution
Head temperature thermistor

defective
Main PCB defective
2-33
Confidential
Error Code 44
Unable to Print 44
LCD
Abnormal temperature of the print head driver.

Step
Cause
Solution
Ink sufficient in the print head
Turn the power off and on, then perform an initial

purge.
Main PCB defective
Error Code 46
Unable to Print 46
LCD

Step
Cause
Solution
Ink absorber box and flushing box

full of drained ink
Replace the ink absorber box and flushing box, then

reset their counts. *
For the resetting procedures of the purge and flushing counts, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.1.
Error Code 48
Unable to Init. 48
LCD
Head flexible cable halfway inserted.

Step
Cause
Solution

cables

Main PCB defective
2-34
Confidential
Error Code 49
Unable to Print 49
LCD
Abnormal head drive voltage. (Does not rise to the specified level)
Error Code 4F
Unable to Print 4F
LCD
The head drive voltage has dropped from the high to low level in an abnormally short period.
Step
Cause
Solution

cables

Carriage PCB defective
Main PCB defective
Error Code 50
Unable to Clean 50
LCD
Purge cam switch does not come ON.

Step
Cause
Solution

maintenance unit or around the
paper feed roller
Purge cam switch harness

connection failure
ASF switching gear A or B

broken
Replace the ASF switching gear A or B.
Replace the paper feed motor.
ASF drive ASSY defective
Replace the ASF drive ASSY.
Main PCB defective
2-35
Confidential
Error Code 52
Unable to Clean 52
LCD
Failed to detect the origin of the purge cam. (Failed to detect the longest OFF domain of the
purge cam)
Step
Cause
Solution

maintenance unit
Main PCB defective
2-36
Confidential
Error Code 5A
Unable to Clean 5A
LCD
Abnormal stop of purge cam being driven.

Error Code 5B
Unable to Clean 5B
LCD
Abnormal stop of pump in the maintenance unit.

Step
Cause
Solution

paper feed roller

PF encoder sensor PCB defective
Replace the PF encoder sensor PCB ASSY.
Ink supply tubes bent
Main drain tube bent
Replace the main drain tube.

broken
10
11
Main PCB defective
2-37
Confidential
Error Code 5D
Unable to Clean 5D
LCD
Driver IC overcurrent protection activated when the purge cam was being driven.
Error Code 5E
Unable to Clean 5E
LCD
Driver IC overcurrent protection activated when the pump was in operation.

Step
Cause
Solution

paper feed roller

broken
Main PCB defective
2-38
Confidential
Error Code 6C
Unable to Print 6C
LCD
Driver IC overcurrent protection activated during running of the ASF motor.

Step
Cause
Solution

maintenance unit or engine unit

broken
ASF motor defective
Main PCB defective
2-39
Confidential
Error Code 6F
Unable to Print 6F
LCD
ASF motor does not stop. (Keeps rotating for 15 seconds or more)
Step
Cause
Solution
Paper feed motor harness

connection failure

connection failure
ASF motor harness connection

failure


broken
ASF motor defective
10
11
12
Main PCB defective
Error Code 75
Unable to clean 75
LCD
Head capping failed.

Step
Cause
Solution

maintenance unit
Foreign materials in the engine

unit
ASF motor defective
Main PCB defective
2-40
Confidential
Error Code 76
Unable to clean 76
LCD
Head uncapping failed.

Step
Cause
Solution

maintenance unit
ASF motor defective
Main PCB defective
Error Code 7A
Unable to clean 7A
LCD
Abnormal stop of purge cam during head capping. (When being driven in the capping direction)
Error Code 7B
Unable to clean 7B
LCD
Abnormal stop of purge cam during head uncapping. (When being driven in the uncapping
direction)
Step
Cause
Solution

maintenance unit
ASF motor defective
Main PCB defective
2-41
Confidential
Error Code 7D
Unable to clean 7D
LCD
Motor driver IC overcurrent protection activated when the purge cam was being driven.
Step
Cause
Solution

maintenance unit
ASF motor defective
Main PCB defective
Error Code 7E
MACHINE ERROR 7E
LCD
Head property data not entered.

Step
Cause
Solution
Head property data not entered
Enter the head property data. Refer to Chapter 5,

Section 1.4.23.
Main PCB defective
2-42
Confidential
Error Code 80
Wrong Paper Size
LCD
Recording paper size error. (During fax/list printing) (The paper size not suitable for recording
fax was detected by the paper width sensor or registration sensor.)
User Check
- Check that the dark recording paper is not used.
Step
Cause
Solution


Main PCB defective
2-43
Confidential
Error Code 81
Wrong Paper Size
LCD
Recording paper size error. (Except during fax/list printing) (The paper width sensor has
detected that the paper width is less than the specified one.)
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
Error Code 82
Paper Jam
LCD
Recording paper jam in paper feeding. (The paper width sensor has failed to detect the leading
edge of paper.)
User Check
- Check that the paper tray is fully inserted.
- Check that the jam clear cover is properly closed.
Step
Cause
Solution
Foreign materials inside the

engine unit
Chute cover not mounted

correctly
Reposition the chute cover.
Paper pull-in rollers worn out or

stained
Replace the paper pull-in roller holder ASSY.
ASF motor defective
Paper feed roller worn out
Main PCB defective
2-44
Confidential
Error Code 84
LCD
Recording paper jam in paper ejecting. (The registration sensor sticks to ON even after
completion of paper ejection.)
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution

Main PCB defective
Error Code 89
Unable to Print 89
LCD
Paper width sensor has failed to detect the origin defined on the paper feed roller.
Step
Cause
Solution

Main PCB defective
2-45
Confidential
Error Code 8A
PRINTER JAM
LCD
PF encoder sensor cannot detect the rotation of the paper feed roller.
Error Code 8B
PRINTER JAM
LCD
PF encoder sensor detects an abnormal stop of the paper feed roller.

User Check
- Check whether recording paper is jammed.
Step
Cause
Solution

engine unit

connection failure
Connection failure of the PF

encoder sensor harness
PF encoder disc defective

Pressure roller release sensor

defective
Replace the pressure roller release sensor PCB

ASSY.
Main PCB defective
2-46
Confidential
Error Code 8C
PRINTER JAM
LCD
Driver IC overcurrent protection activated during running of the paper feed motor.
User Check
- Check whether recording paper is jammed.
Step
Cause
Solution

engine unit

Main PCB defective
Error Code 8F
Unable to Print 8F
LCD
Paper feed motor cannot stop.

Step
Cause
Solution

connection failure
Main PCB defective
2-47
Confidential
Error Code 90
Disc Tray hits at the back
LCD
Disc tray collided against an obstacle in the rear of the machine.

User Check
- Leave at least 10 cm (4 inches) of free space behind the machine.
- Clear any obstacles from the rear of the machine.
- Clear any obstacles from the surroundings of the jam clear cover.
- Remove recording paper from the paper path.
Step
Cause
Solution
Disc tray worn out
Replace the disc tray.

engine unit

correctly

Error Code 91
Unable to Init. 91
LCD
Pressure roller has failed to be released.

Step
Cause
Solution

engine unit

defective

ASSY.
CR encoder sensor defective
Main PCB defective
2-48
Confidential
Error Code 92
Unable to Init. 92
LCD
Pressure roller has failed to be depressed.

Step
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
Error Code 93
Check for a Printable Disc.
LCD
Disc size error. Or no disc is loaded on the disc tray.

User Check
- Load a disc on the disc tray.
- Check whether the disc loaded is within the specification.
Step
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
2-49
Confidential
Error Code A1
Cover is Open
LCD
Document scanner unit opened.

User Check
- Close the document scanner unit.
Step
Cause
Solution
Document scanner open actuator

out of place
Set the document scanner open actuator into place.
Document scanner open sensor

defective
Replace the control panel ASSY.
Panel harness connection failure
Panel PCB defective
Replace the panel PCB ASSY.
Rubber key defective
Replace the rubber key.
Broken boss on the document

scanner unit, which presses the
document scanner open actuator
Replace the document scanner unit.
Main PCB defective
Error Code A2
DOCUMENT JAM
LCD
During ADF scanning, a document of 90 cm or longer is detected.

User Check
- Check whether the document scanned is longer than the specified limit.
- Remove the jammed document.
Step
Cause
Solution

actuator caught on the
surrounding parts
Check and reposition the document scanning

position actuator.

sensor defective
Replace the document scanning position sensor PCB

ASSY.
ADF motor defective
Replace the ADF motor.
ADF unit defective
Replace the ADF unit.
Main PCB defective
2-50
Confidential
Error Code A3
DOCUMENT JAM
LCD
During ADF scanning, the document scanning position sensor does not come ON.
User Check
- Remove the jammed document.
Step
Cause
Solution
Foreign materials in the ADF

document path

actuator out of place
Set the document scanning position actuator into

place.

sensor harness connection failure

sensor defective

ASSY.
ADF motor defective
ADF unit defective
Main PCB defective
Error Code A5
Unable to Scan A5
LCD
Detected abnormal level data in the CIS scanning result during fax sending (1st time).
Error Code A6
Unable to Scan A6
LCD
Detected abnormal level data in the CIS scanning result during fax sending (retry).
Step
Cause
Solution
White level data failure
Use Function code 55.

Refer to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.16.
White reference film stained

CIS unit defective
Main PCB defective
2-51
Confidential
Error Code A7
Unable to Scan A7
LCD
Mismatch between actual CIS type and EEPROM data.

Step
Cause
Solution
CIS type data mismatch
Specify the CIS type with Function code 59.

Main PCB defective
Error Code A8
Unable to Init. A8
LCD
Color parameter matching error. (Used for debugging at the factory.)

Step
Cause
Solution
Program malfunctioning
Reload firmware to the main PCB.

Refer to Chapter 4, Section 2.1.
Main PCB defective
2-52
Confidential
Error Code AF
Unable to Scan AF
LCD
CIS positioning error. (Home positioning failed)

Step
Cause
Solution
Document scanner motor harness

connection failure
Document scanner unit defective
Main PCB defective
Error Code BD
Unable to Scan BD
LCD
Black level data error in scanning.

Step
Cause
Solution
Black level data failure
Use Function code 55.

Main PCB defective
2-53
Confidential
Error Code DF
Lightning damage often causes this error. Check whether the power supply PCB or MJ PCB has
burn marks.
Unable to Init. DF
LCD
SDAA failure.
Error Code E0
Unable to Init. E0
LCD
Cannot start up the modem normally even after resetting it.

Step
1
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
Error Code E2
MACHINE ERROR E2
LCD
Wired LAN MAC address not registered.

Error Code E3
MACHINE ERROR E3
LCD
Failed to get a wireless LAN MAC address.

Step
Cause
Solution
Wireless LAN PCB harness

connection failure
Wireless LAN PCB defective
Replace the wireless LAN PCB ASSY.
Main PCB defective
2-54
Confidential
Error Code E6
Unable to Init. E6
LCD
EEPROM write error.

Step
1
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
Error Code EA
DOCUMENT JAM
LCD
Document removed at phase B. (Detected by the document detection sensor)

User Check
- Send a fax again.
Step
Cause
Solution
Document detection actuator out

of place
Set the document detection actuator into place.
Document detection sensor

defective
Replace the document detection sensor PCB ASSY.
Main PCB defective
Error Code EC
Unable to Init. EC
LCD
LCD connection failure.

Step
Cause
Solution
LCD flat cable connection failure
Check the connection and reconnect the flat cable.
LCD defective
Replace the LCD unit.
Main PCB defective
2-55
Confidential
Error Code ED
Unable to Init. ED
LCD
Touch panel initialization failed

User Check
- Check that nothing is placed on the touch panel.
Step
Cause
Solution
Touch panel harness connection

failure
Touch panel defective
Main PCB defective
Error Code F0
Unable to Init. F0
LCD
Flash file system error.

Step
Cause
Solution
Reload firmware.
Main PCB defective
Error Code FE
Unable to Init. FE
LCD
ROM data acquisition error.

Step
Cause
Solution
Reload firmware.
Main PCB defective
2-56
Confidential
4.2
Recording Paper or Disc Tray Feeding Problems

Problems related to recording paper or disc tray feeding are end user recoverable by following
the User Check items. If the problem persists, follow each procedure in the order of the number
described in the Step column in the tables below.
4.2.1 Recording paper not fed from paper tray (Error code 18, 82, etc.)
User Check
- Check that recording paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.
- Check that paper tray is set.
- Check that the jam clear cover is closed.
- Check that the recording paper weight is 64 to 120 g/m2.
- Check that the disc guide is closed.
- Clean the paper feed roller.
Step
Cause
Solution
ASF motor harness connection

failure
Registration actuator defective
Paper tray defective
Replace the paper tray.
Paper pull-in rollers worn out or

paper pull-in roller holder
defective
ASF motor defective
Main PCB defective
2-57
Confidential
4.2.2 Disc tray not fed in (Error code 91)

User Check
- Insert the disc tray fully.
Step
Cause
Solution
Disc tray worn out, deformed, or

broken

engine unit

connection failure
CR encoder sensor defective
Disc guide sensor defective
Replace the disc guide sensor ASSY.

defective

ASSY.
10
11
Main PCB defective
4.2.3 Two or more sheets of paper fed at a time

User Check
- Check that the recording paper weight is 64 to 120 g/m2.
- Fan the stack of recording paper well and reload it into the paper tray.
Step
Cause
Solution
Bank ASSY worn out
Replace the bank ASSY.
Base pad worn out
Replace the base pad.
2-58
Confidential
4.2.4 Recording paper jam

Paper jam in paper tray (Error code 82, 84, 8A, 8B, 8C)
User Check
- Adjust the paper guide to match the recording paper size.
- Check if too much paper is loaded in the paper tray.
- Check that the jam clear cover is closed.
- Check that the reccording paper weight is 64 to 120 g/m2.
Step
Cause
Solution

paper path

connection failure
ASF motor defective
Main PCB defective
Paper jam around the platen (Error code 31, 38, 3C, 84, 8A, 8B, 8C)
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution

paper path or around the
maintenance unit


defective

ASSY.
Paper feed roller worn out
Inner chute defective
Replace the inner chute ASSY.
Main PCB defective
2-59
Confidential
Paper jam around paper ejection parts (Error code 84, 8A, 8B, 8C)
Step
Cause
Solution

paper path

Paper ejection roller worn out
Main PCB defective
Paper jam during duplex printing (Error code 0E, 18, 8A, 8B, 8C)
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution

paper path
Inner chute defective
Replace the inner chute ASSY.
Main PCB defective
2-60
Confidential
4.2.5 Disc tray jam (Error code 31, 38, 3C, 84, 8A, 8B, 8C, 90)
User Check
- Remove foreign materials from the surroundings of the jam clear cover.
Step
Cause
Solution
Disc tray worn out, deformed, or

broken

paper path or around the
maintenance unit

correctly

Main PCB defective
2-61
Confidential
4.2.6 Recording paper stained

User Check
- Print on blank paper several times to clean the rollers.
- Clean the platen.
- Perform head cleaning.
Step
Cause
Solution
Maintenance unit contaminated
Clean the maintenance unit (see below).
Leveler roller (LR) stained
Clean the leveler roller ASSY with Function code

70. Refer to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.25.
Paper pull-in rollers heavily

contaminated
Other related rollers heavily

contaminated
Cleaner stick
Maintenance unit
(Front)
(cleaning)
2-62
Confidential
4.2.7
Disc tray stained

User Check
- Check whether a stained disc tray is used.
- Make sure that the disc is placed with print side face up.
- Check that the disc is placed correctly on the disc tray.
- Print on several sheets of blank paper to clean the rollers.
- Clean the platen.
- Clean the disc tray.
- Check the setting of the disc print area.
Step
Cause
Solution
Clean the maintenance unit. Refer to Chapter 2,

Section 4.2.6.
2-63
Confidential
4.3
Print-image Problems
4.3.1 Defective images

Examples of defective images
Completely
blank
All black
Random color
Light
Dark
Straight
vertical stripes
Blurred
vertical stripes
White vertical
streaks
Ink splash
Ink splash
Print edges not

aligned
Random
missing dots
White
horizontal
streaks
Stained
leading edge
of recording
paper
Overlapping
lines over the
whole page
Separated lines
over the whole
page
Overlapping
lines at the
trailing edge of
the recording
paper
Separated lines
at the trailing
edge of the
recording
paper
Characters
having
shadows
(ghost)
Traces of
paper pull-in
rollers
VWXYZ
Dirt on the paper
Random
horizontal stains
2-64
Confidential
4.3.2 Troubleshooting from image defect

Completely blank
User Check
- Check that ink remaining is sufficient.
Step
Cause
Solution

Section 4.2.6.
Head property data incorrect
Enter correct head property data. Refer to Chapter 5,

Section 1.4.23.

cables
Check the connection and reconnect the cables.
Main PCB defective
All black
User Check
- Check whether ink cartridges are properly loaded into the correct color
slots.
Step
Cause
Solution
"Printing with black ink only"

enabled with Function code 88
Set selector 3 on AMS04 to "0" with Function code

88, referring to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.33.
Main PCB defective
2-65
Confidential
Random color
User Check
- Check that ink cartridges are loaded in the correct color slots.
Step
Cause
Solution

Section 4.2.6.
Enter the correct head property data. Refer to

Chapter 5, Section 1.4.23.
Head calibration data not written
Perform head calibration with Function code 02.


cables
Check the connection and reconnect the cables.
Main PCB defective
Light
User Check
- Check whether the paper type setting is correct.
- Replace the ink cartridge(s).
Step
Cause
Solution

Section 4.2.6.


Main PCB defective

2-66
Confidential
Dark
User Check
- Check whether the paper type setting is correct.
Step
Cause
Solution

Section 4.2.6.


Main PCB defective
Straight vertical stripes
User Check
- Check whether the recording paper being used is thicker than the specified
limit.
- Print on several sheets of blank paper to clean the related rollers.
- Clean the platen.
Step
Cause
Solution

contaminated
Clean the recording paper path.
Carriage rail dented
2-67
Confidential
Blurred vertical stripes
User Check
limit.
- Clean the platen.
Step
Cause
Solution

contaminated
Clean the recording paper path.
White vertical streaks
Step
Cause
Solution
CR encoder strip stained or

scratched
2-68
Confidential
Ink splash
User Check
- If ink is old, replace the ink cartridge(s).
Step
Cause
Solution

Section 4.2.6.

Main PCB defective
Print edges not aligned
User Check
limit.
Step
Cause
Solution
Vertical print lines not aligned
Adjust vertical print lines with Function code 65.

Inclination of head not adjusted
Adjust the inclination of the head/carriage unit.

Main PCB defective
2-69
Confidential
Random missing dots
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution

Section 4.2.6.
Main PCB defective
White horizontal streaks
User Check
- Check whether the Draft mode is selected.
Step
Cause
Solution

Section 4.2.6.
Adjust the inclination of the head/carriage unit.


Paper feeding correction value not

updated
Update the paper feeding correction value with

Function code 58. Refer to Chapter 5, Section
1.4.17.
PF encoder disc stained or

scratched

Main PCB defective
2-70
Confidential
Stained leading edge of recording paper
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution

Section 4.2.6.

updated

1.4.17.
Head/carriage unit not mounted

correctly
Reposition the head/carriage unit.
Overlapping lines over the whole page
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution
Inclination of the head not

adjusted
Adjust inclination of the head. Refer to Chapter 4,

Section 1.4.


updated

1.4.17.

scratched

Main PCB defective
2-71
Confidential
Separated lines over the whole page
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution
Adjust inclination of the head. Refer to Chapter 4,

Section 1.4.


updated

1.4.17.

scratched

Main PCB defective
Overlapping lines at the trailing edge of the recording paper
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution

updated

1.4.17.

scratched

Main PCB defective
2-72
Confidential
Separated lines at the trailing edge of the recording paper
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution

updated

1.4.17.

scratched

Main PCB defective
Characters having shadows (ghost)
User Check
VWXYZ
Step
Cause
Solution

updated

1.4.17.
Vertical print lines not aligned
Align vertical print lines with Function code 65.


scratched

Main PCB defective
2-73
Confidential
Traces of paper pull-in rollers
User Check
- Clean the paper pull-in rollers.
Step
1
Cause
Solution
Paper pull-in rollers defective
Dirt on the paper
User Check
- Check whether the recording paper being used is not
folded.
- Check that recording paper is loaded correctly in the
paper tray.
- Print on several sheets of blank paper to clean the
related rollers.
- Clean the platen.
Step
Cause
Solution

Section 4.2.6.

Rollers heavily contaminated
2-74
Confidential
Random horizontal stains
User Check
- Clean the platen.
Step
Cause
Solution

Section 4.2.6.

Rollers heavily contaminated
2-75
Confidential
4.4
Software-related Problems
The end user can solve problems pertaining to software, for instance, print cannot be made from
a computer although test print and printer setting print can be made from the machine by
following the User Check items. If the same problem occurs, follow each procedure in the order
of the number described in the Step column in the tables below.
4.4.1 Cannot print data

User Check
- Check that the USB cable or LAN cable is not damaged.
- Check that the correct machine is selected if you have an interface switching device.
- Check the descriptions of the software setting in the users guide.
- Revert the settings to the factory defaults. (Refer to the users guide.)
- Check the driver settings.
Step
1
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
2-76
Confidential
4.5
Network Problems
4.5.1 Cannot make a print through network connection

User Check
- Check the descriptions in the network users guide.
- Reset the network settings. (Refer to the users guide.)
Step
Cause
Solution
Wireless LAN PCB defective
Replace the wireless LAN PCB ASSY.
Main PCB defective
2-77
Confidential
4.6
Document Feeding Problems
4.6.1 Cannot feed documents

User Check
- Set documents fully into the document tray.
- Limit the number of documents to be set in the ADF to a maximum of 15 sheets.
Step
Cause
Solution
Document pull-in rollers stained
Clean the document pull-in rollers.

actuator out of place
Set the document scanning position actuator into

place.
ADF motor harness connection

failure

harness connection failure

defective
Replace the document detection sensor PCB ASSY.

defective
Replace the document separation roller ASSY.
ADF motor defective
Main PCB defective
4.6.2 Document double feeding

User Check
- Check whether a document thinner than the specified one is used.
Step
1
Cause
Solution
ADF separation pad worn out
Replace the ADF separation holder.
2-78
Confidential
4.6.3 Document jam

Document jam in the ADF cover (Error code A2, A3, EA)
User Check
- Check if paper particles such as broken document are jammed around the document slot.
Step
Cause
Solution
Foreign materials around and

inside the ADF cover

sensor harness connection failure

sensor defective

ASSY.
ADF motor defective
Main PCB defective
Document jam inside the ADF and in document ejection area (Error code A2,
A3, EA)
User Check
- Check whether the document scanned is 148 mm or shorter in length.
Step
Cause
Solution
Foreign materials inside the ADF.

surrounding parts

position actuator.
Document pressure bar out of

place
Set the document pressure bar into place.
Document feed roller ASSY

defective
Replace the document feed roller ASSY .
ADF drive gears broken
Replace the ADF drive unit.
Main PCB defective
2-79
Confidential
4.6.4 Wrinkles on documents

User Check
- Check that documents are loaded correctly in the ADF unit.
- Check that the document guides match the document size.
- Check that documents are not curled.
Step
Cause
Solution
Document separation roller worn

out
Replace the document separation roller ASSY.
Document feed rollers worn out
Replace the document feed rollers.
2-80
Confidential
4.7
Scanned-image Problems
4.7.1 Defective images

Light
Scanning position failure
Completely blank
Vertical streaks
Dark
White vertical
streaks
Tinged over the whole page
4.7.2 Troubleshooting from image defect

Light
User Check
- Check if the contrast is set to "Light."
- Clean the scanner glass or ADF glass.
Step
Cause
Solution
White level data defective
Obtain the white level data with Function code 55.

CIS unit defective
Main PCB defective
2-81
Confidential
Scanning position failure
User Check
- Check that the document is placed correctly on the
document cover.
(1) ADF
Step
Cause
Solution
Scanning start position out of

alignment
Adjust the scanning start position with Function

code 54. Refer to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.15.

surrounding parts

position actuator.
(2) Document cover

Step
Cause
Solution
Scanning start position out of

alignment
Adjust the scanning start position with Function

code 54. Refer to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.15.
CIS unit defective
Dark
User Check
- Check if the contrast is set to "Dark."
- Avoid placing the machine in an environment where it will be subjected to
direct sunlight.
Step
Cause
Solution

CIS unit defective
Main PCB defective
2-82
Confidential
Completely blank
User Check
- Check whether documents are loaded upside down.
- Check that documents are loaded correctly in the ADF.
Step
Cause
Solution

CIS unit defective
Main PCB defective
Vertical streaks
User Check
- Check whether the ADF glass or scanner glass is stained.
Step
1
Cause
Solution
CIS unit defective
White vertical streaks
User Check
Step
1
Cause
Solution

CIS unit defective
2-83
Confidential
Tinged over the whole page
User Check
Step
Cause
Solution

CIS unit defective
Main PCB defective
2-84
Confidential
4.7.3 Other scanning problems
CIS unit in the document scanner unit does not move

Step
Cause
Solution

connection failure
Document scanner motor

defective
Main PCB defective
Abnormal noise from document scanner unit

Step
Cause
Solution
ADF scanning impossible

Step
Cause
Solution

connection failure

defective
ADF unit defective
Main PCB defective
2-85
Confidential
4.8
Control Panel Problems
4.8.1 LCD shows nothing

User Check
- Check if the power switch is OFF.
- Load the latest firmware.
Step
Cause
Solution
AC cord defective
Replace the AC cord. (Europe/Asia/Oceania only)
Power supply harness connection

failure
LCD defective
Main PCB defective
4.8.2 Control panel inoperative

User Check
Step
Cause
Solution
Rubber key(s) not set in place
Reposition the control panel ASSY.
Touch panel alignment off
Adjust the touch panel with Function code 78. Refer

to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.30.
Rubber key(s) defective
Replace the rubber key(s).
Panel PCB defective
Main PCB defective
2-86
Confidential
4.8.3 Lamps on the control panel do not light

Step
Cause
Solution
Rubber key(s) not set in place
Reposition the control panel ASSY.
Panel PCB defective
Main PCB defective
4.8.4 Touch panel inoperative (For models with touch panel)

Step
4.8.5
Cause
Solution
Touch panel alignment off

(For models with touch panel)
Adjust the touch panel with Function code 78. Refer

to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.30.
Touch panel harness connection

failure
Touch panel defective
Main PCB defective
Display defect on the LCD

Step
Cause
Solution
LCD defective
Main PCB defective
2-87
Confidential
4.9
Fax Problems
4.9.1 No faxes can be sent

User Check
- Check if the appropriate telephone cord is used or it is plugged in the socket.
- Check the dial mode settings again.
Step
Cause
Solution
Connection failure of the MJ

(LINE) harness
Panel PCB defective
MJ PCB defective
Replace the MJ PCB ASSY.
CIS unit defective
Main PCB defective
4.9.2 Speed dialing will not work

User Check
- Check if speed dial or one-touch dial numbers are correctly registered.
- Check the dial mode settings again.
Step
Cause
Solution
Panel PCB defective
Main PCB defective
2-88
Confidential
4.9.3 No faxes can be received

User Check
- Check the receive mode setting again.
- Check the machine is off-hook.
Step
Cause
Solution
Connection failure of the MJ

(LINE) harness
MJ PCB defective
Main PCB defective
4.9.4 A communications error occurs

User Check
- Check if the telephone cord that comes with the machine is used.
Step
Cause
Solution
MJ PCB defective
Main PCB defective
4.9.5 Receive mode cannot be changed

User Check
- Turn the BT Call Sign mode OFF.
- Turn the Distinctive ring mode OFF.
Step
1
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
4.9.6 Caller ID not displayed

Step
1
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
2-89
Confidential
4.10 Other Problems

4.10.1 The machine cannot be powered on or nothing appears on the LCD
Step
Cause
Solution
AC cord defective
Replace the AC cord. (Europe/Asia/Oceania only)
LCD defective
Panel PCB defective
Main PCB defective
4.10.2 When the power is on, the scanner crackles

Step
Cause
Solution
CIS flat cable connection failure

carriage unit

Main PCB defective
Replace the document scanner cover.
4.10.3 Memory card/PictBridge does not function

User Check
- Check the insertion direction of the memory card.
- Check whether the file data or memory card is supported.
- Use any other memory card to check if the memory card functions.
- Check whether a memory card not supported is inserted to the USB flash memory drive.
- Turn the power off and on.
- Format the memory card.
Step
1
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
2-90
Confidential
4.10.4 Cannot read data from memory card loaded in the media slot
User Check
- Check whether the file data is supported.
- Check whether the size of data in the memory card is out of specification.
- Format the memory card.
Step
1
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
4.10.5 Internal memory errors

User Check
- Delete the stored data.
Step
1
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
4.10.6 Cannot load firmware

User Check
Step
1
Cause
Solution
Main PCB defective
2-91
Confidential
4.10.7
Secure Function Lock related problems

User Check
- Ask the administrator of the machine to unlock the secure function.
4.10.8
Step
Cause
Solution
Cannot unlock the secure function

since the user forgot his/her
password.
Reset the password with Function code 01. Refer to

Main PCB defective
Problems with "Printing with black ink only"

User Check
- Replace ink cartridge(s) that has run out of ink.
Step
4.10.9
Cause
Solution
"Printing with black ink only"

enabled with Function code 88
Set selector 3 on AMS04 to "0" with Function code

88, referring to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.33.
Ink remaining sensor defective
Main PCB defective
Status monitor error "Disc Guide is Open" appears

User Check
- Close the disc guide.
Step
Cause
Solution
Disc guide sensor harness

connection failure
Disc guide sensor defective
Replace the disc guide sensor ASSY.
Main PCB defective
2-92
Confidential
CHAPTER 3 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This chapter details procedures for disassembling and reassembling the machine together with related
notes. The disassembly order flow provided enables you to see at a glance the quickest way to get to
component(s) involved.
At the start of a disassembly job, you check the disassembly order flow that guides you through a
shortcut to the target components.
This chapter also covers screw tightening torques and lubrication points to which the specified
lubricants should be applied during reassembly jobs.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND HANDLING NOTES

To prevent the creation of secondary problems by mishandling, observe the following
precautions during maintenance work.
WARNING
Before replacing parts or units, unplug the power cord and telephone line*.
In particular, when having access to the power supply inside the machine, make sure that the
power cord is unplugged from the electrical outlet; when having access to the main PCB or
MJ PCB*, make sure that both the power cord and telephone line* are unplugged from the
electrical outlet.
*For MFC only
(1) Be careful not to lose screws, washers, or other parts removed for parts replacement.
(2) When using soldering irons and other heat-generating tools, take care not to damage the
resin parts such as wires, PCBs, and covers.
(3) Static electricity charged in your body may damage electronic parts.
Before handling the PCBs, touch a metal portion of the machine to discharge static
electricity charged in your body. When transporting PCBs, be sure to wrap them in
conductive sheets.
When replacing the head/carriage unit, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job
on a static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
(4) Be sure to reinsert self-tapping screws correctly, if removed.
(5) Tighten screws to the torque values listed on the next page.
(6) When connecting or disconnecting cable connectors, hold the connector bodies not the
wires. If the connector has a lock, always slide the connector lock to unlock it.
(7) Before reassembly, apply the specified lubricant to the specified points. (Refer to Section 5
in this chapter.)
(8) After repairs, check not only the repaired portion but also that the connectors and other
related portions function properly before operation checks.
(9) Once the head/carriage unit prints, it will start head locking operation after five seconds
from the end of printing. The head locking operation will take 5 to 10 seconds. NEVER
unplug the power cord before the machine completes the head locking operation; doing so
will make the head/carriage unit unusable and require replacement with a new head/
carriage unit.
When you receive the machine from the user or when you pack it for sending it back to the
user, check the head locking state.
3-1
Confidential
(10) After disconnecting flat cables, check that each cable is not damaged at its end or shortcircuited.
When connecting flat cables, do not insert them at an angle. After insertion, check again
that the cables are not at an angle.
(11) If ink gets on your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth, you need the following treatment.
If ink gets on your skin, wash it off immediately with soap and water.
If ink gets into your eyes, flush them immediately and thoroughly with water. If left
untreated, the eyes may become bloodshot or mildly inflamed. If you feel any
discomfort, consult a doctor immediately.
If ink gets into your mouth, immediately spit it out and consult a doctor.
(12)
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
(13) After completion of reassembly, it is recommended that the dielectric voltage withstand test
and continuity test be conducted.
(14) Before packing the machine for sending it back to the user after repairs, be sure to clean the
flushing guide with a cleaner stick as shown below to prevent ink splashing during
transportation.
Flushing guide
Cleaner stick
(3_001)
3-2
Confidential
PACKING
3-3
Confidential
SCREW CATALOGUE
Taptite, cup S
Taptite, bind B
Taptite, bind B
M4x12
Taptite, cup S
M3x6
Taptite, cup S
M3x10
Taptite, cup B
Taptite, cup B
M3x8
Screw pan (S/P washer)
Taptite, cup B
M3x10
Screw pan (S/P washer)

M3x6
Screw, bind
Screw pan (washer)
Screw, bind
M3x6
Screw pan (washer)

M4x8 DB
Screw, bind
M2.6x4
Screw, bind
M2x12
3-4
Confidential
SCREW TORQUE LIST

Note: For the shape of screws, refer to Section 3 in this chapter.
Location of screw
Page
Screw type
Qty
Tightening torque
Nm (kgfcm)
3-49
Grounding wire (for ADF drive unit) *1
Taptite, cup S M3x6
0.350.05 (3.50.5)
3-52
Scanner hinge (onto the upper cover)
Taptite, bind B M4x12 (black)
0.800.10 (81)
3-53
Scanner hinge (onto the document scanner unit) Taptite, bind B M4x12
0.800.10 (81)
*1 &
3-60
ADF
document cover ASSY (Together with Taptite, cup B M3x10

document reinforcement plate by 2 screws)
0.500.10 (51)
3-61
Scanner hinge support
Taptite, cup B M3x10
0.600.10 (61)
Screw pan (s/p washer) M3x6
0.400.10 (41)
0.500.10 (51)
Taptite, cup B M3x8
0.500.10 (51)
0.400.10 (41)
3-64
*1
Grounding wire (for ADF drive unit)

*1
3-66
ADF drive unit
3-67
Document roller holder
3-68
Control panel ASSY

*2
Taptite, cup S M3x6
0.350.05 (3.50.5)
3-73
LCD unit
Taptite, cup B M3x8
0.400.05 (40.5)
3-75
Front cover (Together with upper cover)
Taptite, bind B M4x12
0.850.05 (8.50.5)
3-76
Upper cover
0.850.05 (8.50.5)
Grounding wire (for touch panel)
3-80
3-82
Main PCB shield
Taptite, cup S M3x6
4/3
*3
0.350.05 (3.50.5)
1/3
*4
0.350.05 (3.50.5)
Main PCB
Taptite, cup S M3x6
Main PCB frame
Screw, bind M3x6
0.350.05 (3.50.5)
(Together with PS/MJ shield unit)
3-83
PS/MJ shield unit
Screw, bind M3x6
0.400.10 (41)
3-85
Power supply PCB
Taptite, cup S M3x6
0.400.10 (41)
MJ shield
Screw, bind M3x6
0.400.10 (41)
Taptite, cup S M3x6
0.400.10 (41)
Grounding wire (for AC power cord)
Screw, pan (washer), M4x8DB
0.600.10 (61)
Ink cartridge detection sensor PCB
Taptite, cup B M3x8
0.500.10 (51)
3-100 Engine unit
0.400.10 (41)
3-104 Maintenance unit
0.600.10 (61)
Taptite, cup S M3x6
0.800.10 (81)
3-105 ASF drive ASSY
0.600.10 (61)
3-106 Carriage motor
Screw, bind M3x6
0.600.10 (61)
3-110 Pressure roller release sensor PCB ASSY
Screw, bind B M2.6x8
0.300.05 (30.5)
3-111 PF encoder sensor PCB ASSY
Screw, bind M2x12
0.150.05 (1.50.5)
0.800.10 (81)
MJ PCB
*5
*6
3-94
*7
3-113 Disc guide cover

*2 For models with touch panel
*3 Main PCB B57U081: 4 screws
B57U082: 3 screws
*4 Main PCB B57U081: 1 screw
B57U082: 3 screws
*5 For MFC only
*6 For 200 V series
3-5
Confidential
LUBRICATION
Apply the specified lubricants to the lubrication points as shown below.
Lubricant type
(Manufacturer)
Lubricant amount
per point
Lubrication points
Permalub BAN-5
(Nippon Koyu)
Head/carriage unit
1.5 mm diameter ball
Switching lever guide
3 mm diameter ball
FLOIL BG1319
(Kanto Kasei)
Leveller roller (LR) ASSY
1 mm diameter ball
CR guide rail (top face)
36
2 mm diameter ball
(Total of 11636 mg)
CR frame (top face)
36
2 mm diameter ball
(Total of 11636 mg)
CR frame
(inner side of the rear upright edge)
46
2 mm diameter ball
(Total of 14846 mg)
(inner side of the front upright edge) 46
2 mm diameter ball
(Total of 14846 mg)
CR guide rail (bottom face)
1 mm diameter ball
2 mm diameter ball
2 mm diameter ball
Paper pull-in roller L
1 mm diameter ball
Disc guide cover

(slideway for the disc guide)
1 mm diameter ball
Outer paper guide

(joint with the switchback roller
shaft)
1 mm diameter ball
Molykote EM-30LP
(Dow Corning)
Head/carriage unit
Apply a 1.5 mm diameter ball of grease (Permalub BAN-5) to the contact point between the
head/carriage unit and the switching lever.
CR guide rail
Apply grease here.
Switching lever
(3_002)
Head/carriage unit
3-6
Confidential

Apply a 3 mm diameter ball of grease (Permalub BAN-5) to the lubrication point below.
(3_117)
Apply grease here.
Leveller roller (LR) ASSY

Apply a 1 mm diameter ball of grease (FLOIL BG1319) to each of the lubrication points below.
Leveler roller (LR) ASSY
Apply grease to
these 2 points.
(3_120)
3-7
Confidential
CR guide rail and CR frame (top face)

Apply a 2 mm diameter ball of grease (FLOIL BG1319) to each of the 72 lubrication points
below.
Lubrication procedure
(1) Move the head/carriage unit to the left end of its travel.
(2) Before applying grease, wipe dust or dirt off the lubrication area with an alcohol soaked
cloth.
(3) Move the head/carriage unit from the left to the right ends of its travel to spread the applied
grease on the CR guide rail and CR frame.
Apply grease to
these 36 points.
Home position of
head/carriage unit
Lubrication points
6.0
CR guide rail
41.05 0.5
57.25 0.5
57.1
(mm)
Lubrication points
Apply grease to
these 36 points.
3-8
CR frame
(3_003)
Confidential
CR frame (inner sides of the front and rear upright edges)

Apply a 2 mm diameter ball of grease (FLOIL BG1319) to each of the 92 lubrication points
below.
Lubrication procedure
(1) Move the head/carriage unit to the left end of its travel.
(2) Before applying grease, wipe dust or dirt off the lubrication area with an alcohol soaked
cloth.
(3) Move the head/carriage unit from the left to the right ends of its travel to spread the applied
grease on the CR frame.
Lubrication points
Apply grease to
these 46 points.
CR frame
Lubrication points
CR guide rail
5.2
Apply grease to
these 46 points.
34.8
13.15
Home position of
head/carriage unit
5.2 34.8
4.1
(mm)
CR frame
5.65 0.5
3.7 0.5
(3_004)
3-9
Confidential
CR guide rail (bottom face)

Apply a 1 mm diameter ball of grease (FLOIL BG1319) to each of the lubrication points below.
Viewed from the bottom

CR frame
50 1
40 1
30 1
(Right)
35 1
22 1
20 1
3.5 0.5
0.5 -1.0
3.5-4.0
(mm)
CR guide rail
Apply grease to
these 3 points.
Apply grease to
these 3 points.
(3_005)
Document pick-up roller and document separation roller

Apply a 2 mm diameter ball of grease (Molykote EM-30LP) to each of the lubrication points
below.

Apply grease here.
Apply grease here.

(3_005_1)
3-10
Confidential

Apply a 1 mm diameter ball of grease (Molykote EM-30LP) to each of the lubrication points
below.
Rib
Apply grease here.
Paper pull-in gear

Paper pull-in roller R
Engine unit
(Bottom side)
(3_006)
Disc guide cover

Apply a 1 mm diameter ball of grease (Molykote EM-30LP) to each of the grooves through
which the bosses of the disc guide slide.
Disc guide cover
Apply grease here.
Boss of the disc guide

Apply grease here.
(Front)
Disc guide
Apply grease here.
3-11
Apply grease here.
(3_007)
Confidential
Outer paper guide

Apply a 1 mm diameter ball of grease (Molykote EM-30LP) to each of the joints between the
outer paper guide and the switchback roller shaft.
Hook
Apply grease here.
Apply grease here.
Hook
Outer paper guide
(Front)
(3_101a)
3-12
Confidential
OVERVIEW OF GEARS
Maintenance unit
3
3
1
<Name of gears>
1
LX6797
ASF SWITCHING GEAR A
LX3420
ASF SWITCHING GEAR B
LX3421
GEAR RETAINING RING
ADF drive unit
(Rear)
(Left)
2
3
(3_060a)
0COGQHIGCTU
.2 )GCT

.: +FNGIGCT
.: )GCT
.: 5GRCTCVKQPTQNNGTIGCT
1WVGT
3-13
Confidential
ROUTING OF HARNESSES, FLAT CABLES and INK SUPPY TUBES

1
Upper cover: Document scanner motor harness, ADF motor harness*1 and grounding wire*1,
Document detection sensor harness*1, and Document scanning position sensor harness*1
Boss
Top of the
harness spacer
Document detection sensor harness *1
and document scanning position sensor harness *1,
which are taped together
(To be routed on the harness spacer)
Upper cover
(To be routed
harness
beneath the
harness spacer) ADF motor harness and
its grounding wire *1
Grounding wire *1
ADF motor harness *1

Document
detection sensor
harness (white) *1
Cable guide
Boss
Document scanning
Document scanner position sensor
harness (red) *1
motor harness
Cable guide
(3_008)
3-14
Confidential
CIS flat cable
Cable guides
CIS flat cable
Flat core
Cable guide
Lock arm
Upper cover
(3_009)
3-15
Confidential
Underside of the ADF unit: Document detection sensor harness*1 and ADF motor harness*1

Cable guide "a"
Document detection sensor harness (white)
ADF unit (Bottom side)
Document detection sensor PCB ASSY
ADF motor harness

Cable guide "b"
ADF harness ASSY
(3_010)
3-16
Confidential
Top side of the ADF unit: ADF harness ASSY (consisting of ADF motor harness and grounding wire,
document detection sensor harness and document scanning position sensor harness)

Document scanning
position actuator
Cable guide "d"
Cable guide "c"
ADF unit
Document scanning
position sensor PCB ASSY
Document scanning
position sensor harness (red)
Grounding wire
ADF motor harness (blue)
Document detection
sensor harness (white)
Document scanning
(3_011)
ADF harness ASSY
3-17
Confidential
Upper cover: Speaker harness
Cable guide
Main PCB
Speaker
(3_012)
Cable guide
Speaker harness
Upper cover
(Front)
3-18
Confidential
Top left side of the lower cover: ASF motor harness, Carriage motor harness, Paper feed motor
harness, Power supply harness, MJ (LINE) harness* and MJ (EXT) harness*
* For MFC only

MJ (LINE) harness *
(yellow)
ASF motor harness
Section
"X"
Carriage motor
harness
MJ (EXT) harness *
(black)
Main PCB
Paper feed motor
harness
Power supply harness
(3_013)
Lower cover
PF/registration
sensor harness ASSY
Note: Gather the slack of the MJ (LINE) harness* around section "X" shown above.
3-19
Confidential
Front left corner of the lower cover: Wireless LAN PCB harness, PF/registration sensor harness
ASSY, Power supply harness, Carriage motor harness, ASF motor harness, Paper feed motor harness,
MJ (LINE) harness* and MJ (EXT) harness*
* For MFC only
ASF motor harness
SDAA cover *1
Carriage motor
harness
Power supply
harness
PF/registration
sensor harness
ASSY
MJ (LINE)
harness *1
(yellow)
PF/registration
sensor harness
ASSY
Main PCB
Wireless LAN PCB

harness
(Left)
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
(3_014)
Grounding wire
3-20
Confidential
PS/MJ shield unit: MJ (LINE) harness*1, MJ (EXT) harness*1 and Power supply harness
*1 For MFC only
*2 For models with main PCB B57U082
Lower PS/MJ frame
Fit left end "g"
over here.
Power supply PCB
MJ shield
PS PCB insulator
(Right)
Power cord
Fit right end "f" in here.
Lock
(Left)
Ferrite core
*2
Lower PS/MJ
frame
MJ (LINE) harness *1
(yellow)
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
Cable guide on the

MJ PCB insulator
(3_016)
PS PCB insulator
Stoppers on the
lower PS/MJ frame
Power supply shield
Outwardly bent section

of the power supply shield
(Left)
Ferrite core
*2
(yellow)
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
Cable guide on the

MJ PCB insulator
Lock
Power supply
harness
3-21
(3_015)
Front rib of the lower

PS/MJ frame
(The front end of the power supply
shield should be set inside the front
rib of the lower PS/MJ frame.)
Confidential
*1 For MFC only

100 V series
Ferrite core
Power cord bush
Power cord
MJ PCB *1
Cable guides
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
Ferrite core *2
(yellow)
Power supply PCB
Power supply shield

(3_017)
200 V series
Ferrite core
Power inlet
Power cord
MJ PCB *1
Cable guides
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
Ferrite core *2
(yellow)
Power supply PCB
Power supply shield

(3_018)
3-22
Confidential
On the tube support plate: Carriage flat cables
Folded section
Ferrite core
Carriage flat cables
Pocket
Lower cover
Boss
Cable guides
Tube/cable guide
Tube support wire
(3_019)
Tube support plate
3-23
Confidential
10
On the tube support plate and head/carriage unit: Ink supply tubes
Lower cover
Sponge
Tube clamp (1)

Tube clamp (2)
Black
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta
Tube guides
Black
(Rear)
Tube support plate
Bent section of tube support wire
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta
(3_020)
Note: Bind ink supply tubes with two tube clamps. As shown above, align four ink supply tubes
in the order of Magenta, Cyan, Yellow, and Black from bottom to up. Set tube clamp (1) on
magenta, cyan, and yellow ink tubes from the bottom, and tube clamp (2) on black, yellow, and
cyan ink tubes from the top.
Head/carriage unit
Head joint spring
Guide boss
(3_021)
Ink supply tubes
Head joint
Note: Make sure that all of the four ink supply tubes are routed in front of the guide boss as
shown above.
3-24
Confidential
11
Around the right side of the lower cover
Carriage motor
ASF motor
ASF motor/encoder
PCB
ASF encoder disc
Pressure roller
release sensor
harness
ASF encoder
sensor harness
Purge cam
switch
harness
ASF motor harness

Pressure roller
release sensor
harness
ASF encoder
sensor harness
Ferrite core of
ASF motor harness
(Right)
Ferrite core of
carriage motor harness
ASF motor harness

Ink cartridge cover sensor harness
Lower cover
(3_022)
(Ink cartridge cover sensor ASSY)
3-25
Confidential
12
Rear left corner of the lower cover: PF/registration sensor harness ASSY (consisting of PF encoder
sensor harness and registration sensor harness) and Paper feed motor harness
CR guide rail
Registration sensor holder
PF encoder sensor PCB ASSY

PF encoder disc
PF/registration sensor
harness ASSY
Lower cover
Registration sensor harness
PF encoder sensor harness
harness ASSY
Ferrite core
PF encoder
sensor PCB
Paper feed
motor harness
Encoder PCB
support
Latch
Paper feed motor

harness threaded
through the cutout
provided in the encoder
PCB support
Cable guide
(3_023)
3-26
Confidential
13
Whole of the lower cover
Lower cover
Ink supply tubes
Carriage flat
cables 1-4
Carriage flat
cable 3
Carriage flat
cable 1
Pressure roller
release sensor
harness
ASF motor
harness
MJ (EXT)
harness
ASF encoder
harness
(3_024)
Paper feed
motor harness
Power supply
harness
Carriage
motor harness
PF/registration
sensor harness
Carriage
flat cable 2
Carriage
flat cable 4

flat cable
Ink remaining sensor flat cable
High-yield ink cartridge sensor flat cable
3-27
Confidential
DISASSEMBLY FLOW
3-28
Confidential
3-29
Confidential
DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
9.1
Preparation
[ 1 ] Transferring Received FAX Data

When the machine at the user site requires to be repaired, unplugging the power cord from the
electrical outlet for sending the machine for repair will lose received FAX data if left in the
machine.
To prevent such data loss, the service personnel should instruct end users (e.g., by telephone) to
transfer data to another facsimile machine or PC using the procedure below.
NOTE: The number of files that can be transferred at a time is 99. To transfer 100 files or more,
carry out the following procedure more than one time.
TIP: If there are both color and monochrome data in a file to be transferred, the monochrome
data will be transferred first. If the receiver machine does not support the color function, the
sender machine cannot transfer color data, resulting in an error.
Transferring faxes to another fax machine
Operating Procedure
(1) Press the Stop/Exit key to interrupt the error (if displayed) temporarily.
(2) Press the Menu key.
(3) Press the
or
key to choose "Service."
(4) Press the OK key.

TIP: For models with touch panel, you may press the Service key.
(5) Press the
or
key to choose "Data Transfer."

TIP: For models with touch panel, you may press the Data Transfer key.
(7) Press the
or
key to choose "Fax Transfer."

TIP: For models with touch panel, you may press the Fax Transfer key.
(9) If "No Data" appears on the LCD, there are no faxes left in the machines memory. Then
press the Stop/Exit key.
If a fax number entry screen appears, there are faxes in the machines memory. Then enter
the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded
(10) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
3-30
Confidential
Transferring faxes to a PC
Operating Procedure
The following procedure uses the fax machine and your PC.
(1) Press the Stop/Exit key to interrupt the error (if displayed) temporarily.
(3) Press the
or
key to choose "Fax."

TIP: For models with touch panel, you may press the Fax key.
(5) Press the
or
key to choose "Setup Receive."

TIP: For models with touch panel, you may press the Setup Receive key.
(7) Press the
or
key to choose "Memory Receive."

TIP: For models with touch panel, you may press the Memory Receive key.
(9) Press the
or
key to choose "PC Fax Receive."

TIP: For models with touch panel, you may press the PC Fax Receive key.
(11) If the "Run PC-Fax on your computer." appears on the LCD, press the OK key.
(12) Click Start | All Programs | Brother | MFC-XXXX | PC-FAX Receiving | Receive.
Wait for the PC-Fax Receiving dialog box to appear. Confirm the message and click OK.
The PC-FAX icon appears in your PC task tray.
(13) Press the
or
key to choose "<USB>" or the PC you run in step (12).

TIP: For models with touch panel, you may press the <USB> key.
(15) Press
or
key to choose "Backup Print: On" or "Backup Print: Off."

TIP: For models with touch panel, you may press the "Backup Print: On" or "Backup
Print: Off."
NOTE: Choosing "Backup Print: On" prints the fax.
(17) Press the Stop/Exit key.
3-31
Confidential
[ 2 ] Backing up Machine Information

Before starting repair, the service personnel should back up the following machine information
and user setting information into an external memory (memory card or USB flash memory).
- Machine information (Preset values, counter values, error information, machine
specifications data, etc.)
- User setting information (telephone directory, password, station ID, transfer information,
telephone area code, user settings, etc.)
- Other data (Received fax data, ICM/OGM data, etc.)
Note that the following information cannot be backed up.
-
MAC address
Call and caller ID records
Activity report
Fax data to be sent (by delayed-timer, redialing, and polling)
Operating Procedure
Refer to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.12 "Backup of Machine Information (Function code 46) (Useraccessible)."
3-32
Confidential
[ 3 ] Disconnecting Cables and Removing Accessories

(1) Disconnect the following:
- Power cord from the electrical outlet (or from the machine in the case of 200 V models)
- Modular jack of the telephone line*1
- USB cable, if connected
- LAN cable*2, if connected (if not connected, remove the LAN cap*2)
- USB digital camera cable or USB flash memory drive*3, if connected
- Modular jack of the external telephone set from the external telephone line jack*1, if
connected (if not connected, remove the EXT cap*1)
(2) Remove the protective part (for paper tray) and the paper tray ASSY.
(3) Remove the disc tray*4 and memory cards*5 if inserted in the machine, then store them.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
For MFC only

For wired LAN-enabled models
For models supporting PictBridge/USB flash memory drive
For disc printing models
For models with PhotoCapture Center
Protective
cap *2
LAN
USB
Disc tray *4
EXT cap *1
Paper tray ASSY
200 V series
Protective part for paper tray

Power cord
Telephone line cord *1
3-33
(3_025)
Confidential
(4) Open the ink cartridge cover, remove all four ink cartridges, and set the protective part
instead. Check that the right-hand latch fits in the hole provided in the ink refill ASSY.
(3_026)
Protective part
3-34
Confidential
9.2
Jam Clear Cover

(1) Open the jam clear cover.
(2) Lightly press the right-hand end (viewed from the rear) of the jam clear cover inwards to
release the boss, then remove the jam clear cover.
Upper cover
(Rear)
Jam clear cover
Boss
(3_027)
3-35
Confidential
9.3
Head/Carriage Unit
During disassembly jobs, except when removing the ink refill ASSY or engine unit (including
the maintenance unit), leave the head/carriage unit in the machine.
Before removing the head/carriage unit, ink refill ASSY or engine unit, you need to remove all
four ink cartridges and set the protective part instead (see page 3-34). Be sure to insert the
protective part into place to prevent ink remaining in the ink supply tubes from leaking and the
machine from getting stained with leaked ink. (Check that the right-hand latch fits in the hole
provided in the ink refill ASSY.)
Note: When replacing the head/carriage unit, put on a grounding wrist band and perform the job
on a static mat. Also take care not to touch the conductor sections on the flat cables.
Note: During the removal or installation job for the head/carriage unit, take care not to
contaminate the CR encoder strip or PF encoder disc with ink or grease.
Note: If you replace the head/carriage unit, also replace the ink cartridges. This is because
sufficient ink volume is necessary for refilling the ink supply tubes after replacement of the
head/carriage unit.
(1) Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
(2) Open the document scanner unit until it locks.
The "Cover is Open." message appears on the LCD.
(3) Hold down the Stop/Exit key to move the head/carriage unit to the center of its travel.
Stop/Exit key
Document
scanner unit

(3_028)
Head/carriage unit
Lower cover
Upper cover
3-36
Confidential
(4) Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.

(5) Slightly close the document scanner unit so that the scanner cover support comes to be
almost upright. As shown below, press the rib of the section outwards in which the top of
the scanner cover support is fitted in order to widen the section, and pull out the boss
provided on the top left of the support to the right and towards you.
Document
scanner unit
Rib
Boss
(3_029)
Upper cover
Assembling Note: When setting the top of the scanner cover support into place, press the rib
provided on the underside of the document scanner unit outwards as shown above.
3-37
Confidential
(6) Remove the CIS flat cable cover and the harness cover by inserting the tip of a flat
screwdriver into the slots (indicated by arrows in the figure below) and lifting up those
covers. For easier removal, start from the rear and finally pull out the tabs.
Note: When removing the harness cover, turn the scanner cover support upright for easier
removal.
CIS flat cable cover
Harness cover
Tab
Tab Tab
Tab
Lower cover
(3_030)
Upper cover
3-38
Confidential
(7) Move the head/carriage unit to the left end of its travel (to the place where the whole of the
head/carriage unit can be seen) by hand.
Head/carriage unit
PF encoder disc
(3_031)
Upper cover
(8) Insert the tip of a flat screwdriver into the square hole provided in the head cover to release
the latch in the direction of the arrow, then release other three latches and lift up the head
cover.
Head cover
Tabs
Square opening
Latch
Latch
Head/carriage unit
Carriage PCB ASSY
Latches
(3_032)
Upper cover
3-39
Confidential
(9) Unlock the connector on the carriage PCB and disconnect the head flexible cable.
Note: After disconnecting the flexible cable, check that it is not damaged at its end or
short-circuited. When connecting the flexible cable, do not insert it at an angle. After
insertion, check again that it is not at an angle and then lock the connector.
(10) Release the lock spring and slightly pull up the front end of the carriage PCB. Then take the
carriage flat cables out of the cable guide (shown on page 3-48) on the head/carriage unit
and release the hole provided in the film from the boss shown below.
(11) Take the carriage PCB ASSY out of the head/carriage unit and put it on the upper cover in
front of the head/carriage unit.
Pull here to unlock.

Head/carriage unit
Head flexible cable

Connector
Carriage PCB ASSY
Film
Carriage PCB ASSY
Lock spring
Upper cover
Hole
Head/carriage unit
Boss
(3_033)
Head flexible cable
3-40
Confidential
(12) Pull out the head joint spring to the right.

(13) Pull the head joint up and off the head/carriage unit.
Immediately, wrap the head joint in a clean, lint-free cloth and keep it higher than the ink
supply tubes to prevent ink remaining in the ink supply tubes from leaking and the machine
from getting stained with leaked ink.
Note: Wipe off the ink remaining on the section where the head joint was mounted with a
clean, lint-free cloth.
(14) Remove the head joint rubber (that is a part of the head/carriage unit but may come off with
the head joint) and put it on a clean vinyl sheet while taking care not to contaminate it.
Head joint spring
Head/carriage unit
Guide boss
Ink supply tubes
Head joint spring
Head joint
Head joint
PF encoder disc
Head joint rubber
Head/carriage unit
(3_034)
Upper cover
Assembling Note: Make sure that all of the four ink supply tubes are routed in front of the
guide boss as shown above.
3-41
Confidential
(15) Move the head/carriage unit slightly to the right as shown below, then set the LR (Leveler
Roller) positioning jig so that its bottom boss fits in the hole provided in the engine chassis.
(16) While pressing the idle pulley holder to the right, remove the CR timing belt from the
carriage motor pulley and the idle pulley.
Note: When removing the CR timing belt, do not touch the CR encoder strip or the
lubrication area on the engine unit with your hands or with the CR timing belt.
Hole for
LR positioning jig
LR positioning jig
Upper cover
Idle pulley
PF encoder disc
Idle pulley
CR frame
CR guide rail
Ink supply tubes
Head/carriage unit
Idle pulley holder

CR timing belt
CR encoder strip
Upper cover
CR timing belt
Idle pulley
Idle pulley holder
Carriage motor pulley
(3_035)
Idle pulley spring
3-42
Confidential
(17) Loosely tie the CR timing belt in a bundle on the head/carriage unit as shown below.
(18) Move the head/carriage unit to the left end of its travel by hand.
(19) Press the right and left tabs of the leveler roller (LR) ASSY inwards and pull the ASSY
towards you to release it downwards from the head/carriage unit.
Head/carriage unit
LR positioning jig
CR timing belt
(3_036)
Upper cover
CR frame
Tabs of the leveler
roller (LR) ASSY
(20) Slightly lift up the rear end of the head/carriage unit to release it from the CR guide rail
(through the two cutouts), then release the front end from the CR frame and take the head/
carriage unit up and out of the machine.
Note: Do not touch the head nozzles (the printing ends) or ink supply ports (to which ink
supply tubes are connected) of the print head; doing so will not only stain your hands with
ink but also damage the nozzles and supply ports. If you do touch them though, clean them.
Head/carriage unit
CR timing belt
Cutouts
LR positioning jig
CR guide rail
(3_037)
Upper cover
CR frame
3-43
Confidential
(21) Remove the CR timing belt from the head/carriage unit.

(22) Press the rear ends of the leveller roller (LR) ASSY inwards and take them out through the
two cutouts provided in the CR guide rail.
LR positioning jig
Cutouts
CR guide rail
Upper cover
(3_038)
3-44
Confidential
(23) A head/carriage unit is assigned a property code that represents the properties unique to
that head/carriage unit. The property code is printed on head property labels--bar code label
and QR code label, each of which is attached to the lower cover and head/carriage unit,
respectively.
When you remove the head/carriage unit and store it separately from the machine, remove
the property label (bar code label) from the lower cover and store it together with the head/
carriage unit.
If you replace the head/carriage unit, attach the property label (bar code label) that comes
with the new head/carriage unit to the lower cover as shown below.
ALR7795500000
HEDC6101119 000ZG
Property code
(13-digit)
Head property label

(QR code)
Head/carriage unit
(3_039)
3-45
Confidential
Note: When storing the removed head/carriage unit for a long period, be sure to put an air
buffer cap on the head/carriage unit and store the unit in the head casing. (To secure the
head/carriage unit, set it in the lower head casing and slide it to the right as shown below.)
Leaving the head/carriage unit out of the casing will cause the head nozzles and ink supply
ports to dry up, resulting in a damaged head.
Latch
Head casing (upper)
Air buffer cap
Head joint rubber
Head/carriage unit
Head casing (lower)
Cap stopper
(3_039_1)
Assembling Note: Mount the head/carriage unit, using the following steps.
1) Set the leveler roller ASSY on the engine unit. (See page 3-44.)
2) When mounting a new head/carriage unit, apply the specified lubricant to the specified
points on the unit, referring to Section 5.
3) When mounting the CR timing belt, insert it into the slit provided in the head/carriage unit
so that the toothed side faces inwards as shown below. Make sure that the belt is fully
inserted inside the latches
Viewed from
the bottom
Latches
(3_039_2)
3-46
Confidential
4) First fit the front end of the head/carriage unit over the CR frame and then set the rear end
onto the CR guide rail.
Make sure that the hook (see below) provided on the bottom of the head/carriage unit
catches the front edge of the CR frame and the two rear bosses are fitted in the two cutouts
(shown on page 3-44) in the CR guide rail.
Rear bosses
(3_039_3)
Hook
5) Set the LR (Leveler Roller) fitting jig on the head/carriage unit vertically and then tilt it
towards you, as shown below. This pushes the leveler roller (LR) ASSY rearwards and
upwards, fitting it over the head/carriage unit.
LR fitting jig
LR fitting jig
Ink supply tubes
Head flexible
cable
Carriage flat
cables
Head/carriage unit
Upper cover

(3_040)
6) Slide the head/carriage unit by hand to check that it moves smoothly. If it does not move
smoothly, the leveler roller (LR) ASSY is not in place. Go back to step 5).
3-47
Confidential
7) Remove the LR fitting jig and LR positioning jig.

8) Untie the CR timing belt loosely tied. First, at the left end, set the belt on the idle pulley.
Next, press the idle pulley holder to the right and at the right end, set the belt on the carriage
motor pulley. (See page 3-42.)
9) Slide the head/carriage unit by hand to check that it smoothly moves to the right and left
ends of its travel.
10) Set the head joint rubber on the head/carriage unit and secure the head joint to the head/
carriage unit with the head joint spring. (See page 3-41.)
11) Mount the carriage PCB ASSY on the head/carriage unit, route the carriage flat cables
through the cable guide, and fit the hole provided in the film over the boss on the head/
carriage unit as shown below.
Make sure that the head/carriage unit is secured with the lock spring.
12) Connect the head flexible cable to the connector on the carriage PCB and then lock the
connector.
Hole
Carriage PCB ASSY
Film
Lock spring
Boss
Head flexible cable

Cable guide
(3_040_1)
13) Set the head cover into place.

14) If a new head/carriage unit is mounted, apply the specified lubricant to the specified points
on the sliding surface of the CR guide rail and CR frame, referring to Section 5.
15) Check that the CR encoder strip and PF encoder disc are free of grease and ink. If they are
stained with grease or ink, replace them.
16) Slide the head/carriage unit by hand to check that it smoothly moves to the right and left
ends of its travel. At the same time, check that the ink supply tubes and carriage flat cables
are not twisted.
17) If a new head/carriage unit is mounted, make adjustments specified in Chapter 4, Section
4.1.
3-48
Confidential
9.4
Document Scanner Unit and Scanner Cover Support

The document scanner unit should be removed together with the ADF & document cover ASSY
(for models with ADF) or the document cover ASSY (for models without ADF). The removal
procedure of the ASSY from the document scanner unit is given in Section 9.5. The
disassembly of the ADF & document cover ASSY (for models with ADF) is detailed in Section
9.6.
(1) Disconnect the CIS flat cable from the main PCB. Press the lock arm on the upper cover to
the right and take the flat core up and out of the upper cover. Remove the flat core from the
CIS flat cable.
Note: After disconnecting the flat cable, check that the cable is not damaged at its end or
short-circuited. When connecting the flat cable, do not insert it at an angle. After insertion,
check again that it is not at an angle.
(2) Release the CIS flat cable from the cable guides.
(3) Release the grounding wire*1 by removing the screw*1.
(4) Disconnect the following harnesses from the main PCB.
- ADF motor harness (4-wire)*1
- Document scanning position sensor harness (3-wire)*1
- Document detection sensor harness (3-wire)*1
- Document scanner motor harness (4-wire)


Taptite, cup S *1
M3x6
CIS flat cable

Flat core
Cable guides
Lock arm
Document detection
sensor harness *1
(white)
Document scanning
position sensor harness *1
(red)
(3_041)

Upper cover
Grounding wire *1
Document scanning
position sensor
harness (red) *1

harness (white) *1
Document scanner
motor harness
ADF motor
harness *1
3-49
Main PCB
Confidential
(5) Slightly tilt the scanner cover support towards you, press the upper cover outwards and pull
out the scanner cover support.

CIS flat cable
Document
scanner unit
Upper cover
Document detection
sensor harness *1
(white)
Document scanning
position sensor harness *1
(red)
Document scanner
motor harness
(3_042)
Grounding wire *1
(6) Models with ADF Take the document detection sensor harness*1 and document scanning
position sensor harness*1 out of the cable guides provided on the left inside of the upper
cover.
(7) Remove the harness spacer and take the document scanner motor harness, ADF motor
harness*1 and its grounding wire*1 out of the upper cover.
Harness spacer
CIS flat cable
Document scanner
unit
Document detection
sensor harness *1
(white)
Document
scanning position
Upper cover
sensor harness *1
(red)
Document scanner
Grounding wire *1
motor harness
3-50
(3_043)
Confidential
Assembling Notes:
Models with ADF As shown below, route the document scanner motor harness, ADF motor
harness*1 and its grounding wire*1, then set the harness spacer. Next, route the document
detection sensor harness*1 and document scanning position sensor harness*1 (which are
taped together).
Models without ADF As shown below, route the document scanner motor harness and then
set the harness spacer.
Boss
Top of the
harness spacer
Document detection sensor harness *1
and document scanning position sensor harness *1,
which are taped together
(To be routed on the harness spacer)
Upper cover
(To be routed
harness
beneath the
harness spacer) ADF motor harness and
its grounding wire *1
Grounding wire *1

Document
detection sensor
harness (white) *1
Cable guide
Boss
Document scanning
Document scanner position sensor
harness (red) *1
motor harness
Cable guide
(3_008)
3-51
Confidential
(8) At the rear of the machine, remove the screw (black) that secures the scanner hinge.
(9) Open the document scanner unit fully, turn up the front end of the scanner hinge bushing,
and pull the document scanner unit up and out of the machine.
Note: Pulling up the document scanner unit without fully opening it opens the scanner
hinges suddenly and unexpectedly with great force. It is DANGEROUS!
Hinweis: Wird die Scannerabdeckung nach oben gezogen, ohne sie zuvor vollstndig
geffnet zu haben, schnellen die Scannerscharniere pltzlich und unerwartet mit groer
Kraft nach oben. Dies ist GEFHRLICH!

Document scanner
unit
Scanner hinge
Scanner hinge
bushing
CIS flat cable
Document detection
sensor harness *1
(white)
Document
scanning position
sensor harness *1
(red)
Document scanner
motor harness
Taptite, bind B
M4x12 (Black)

Grounding wire *1
Upper cover
(3_044)
Assembling Note: If you replace the document scanner unit, acquire the white level data and
set the CIS scanner area (Function code 55), referring to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.16.
3-52
Confidential
(10) Remove the five screws from the scanner hinge and take it off the document scanner unit.
Taptite, bind B
M4x12
Scanner hinge
(3_045)
3-53
Confidential
9.5
ADF & Document Cover ASSY (For models with ADF),

Document Cover ASSY (For models without ADF)
(1) Turn the ADF & document cover ASSY*1 or document cover ASSY*2 upright and slightly
lift it up.
(2) At each of the ADF hinges, insert the tip of a flat screwdriver into the slit provided at the
front of the ADF hinge and push the latch on the document scanner cover to the front to
release the latch from the ADF hinge, then pull the ADF & document cover ASSY*1 or
document cover ASSY*2 up and out of the document scanner unit.
(3) Slightly turn the ADF hinges and remove them from the ADF & document cover ASSY*1
or document cover ASSY*2.
ADF hinge

Latch on the document

scanner unit
ADF hinge

(3_046)
Assembling Note: When mounting the ADF & document cover ASSY*1 or document cover
ASSY*2 on the document scanner cover, put a magazine or a stack of paper about one inch (2 to
3 cm) thick between them to secure room for looseness of harnesses. Do not use the one that
may scratch or contaminate the scanner glass.
3-54
Confidential
Models with ADF Remove the document sponge ASSY*1 using the steps below.
(4) Turn the ADF and document cover ASSY*1 upside down.
(5) Using the tip of a flat screwdriver, lightly press the three latches on the document sponge
ASSY *1 inwards in the order of c to e to release them.
(6) Remove the two hooks of the document sponge ASSY *1 from the retainers of the ADF &
document cover ASSY*1 to separate the document sponge ASSY.
Latch ( )
Document sponge ASSY *1
Latch ( )
Latch ( )
Hooks
Retainers
(Right)
(3_047)
3-55
Confidential
9.6
Disassembly of ADF & Document Cover ASSY (For models with ADF)
(1) At the front and rear ends of the document pressure bar, pull the lock arms outwards to
release the document pressure bar. The spring also comes off.
Lock arm
Spring
(Rear)
Lock arm
ADF & document cover ASSY
(3_048)
Note: When handling the document pressure bar, be careful not to stain or scratch the white
reference film on the bar.
3-56
Confidential
ADF top covers and decoration sheets

(2) Turn the ADF & document cover ASSY right side up.
(3) Slide the ADF top cover R outwards to release the hooks from the ADF & document cover
ASSY. The decoration sheet R also comes off.
(4) Slide the ADF top cover L outwards to release the hooks from the ADF & document cover
ASSY. The decoration sheet L also comes off.
ADF top cover R

Hook
Hook
Hook
Decoration sheet R
ADF top cover L
Decoration sheet L
Hook
ADF cover ASSY

3-57
(3_049)
Confidential
ADF front cover and ADF document support

(5) Turn the ADF & document cover ASSY upside down.
(6) Remove the ADF front cover while releasing the four retainers in the direction of the
arrows shown below using a flat screwdriver.
Retainer
ADF front cover
Retainers
(3_050)
Retainer
(8) Remove the ADF document support.
(9) With the ADF document support flap being closed, first pull out the rear boss and then
release the front one.
ADF document
support flap
ADF document support
(Rear)
(3_051)
Assembling Note: When setting the ADF document support flap into place, first fit the front
boss into the ADF document support and then slide the rear one into it.
3-58
Confidential
ADF back cover and ADF cover ASSY

(11) At the rear end of the ADF & document cover ASSY, release the latches provided on the
ADF back cover, starting from the right end, with a flat screwdriver and then remove the
ADF back cover.
(12) Remove the ADF cover ASSY.
ADF back cover
(Right)

ADF cover ASSY
(3_052)
Ejection films
(14) Remove the four ejection films.
Note: Once removed, the ejection films will become unusable and new ones will have to be
put back in.
Ejection films

(3_053)
3-59
Confidential
ADF unit
(15) Remove screw "a."
(17) Remove two screws "b" (that secure the document reinforcement plate and ADF unit
together to the document cover ASSY) and the document reinforcement plate.
(18) Remove two screws "c."
(19) Slightly lift up the left end of the ADF unit, slide it to the left to align the square openings
with the locks of the document cover ASSY, and take the ADF unit up and off the
document cover ASSY.
"b"
Document reinforcement plate
"c"
"b"
"c"
ADF unit
Square openings
(Left)
(Rear)
Document cover ASSY
Locks
"a"
(3_054)
"a," "b" and "c": Taptite, cup B M3x10
3-60
Confidential
ADF separation holder

(20) Remove the ADF separation holder and its spring.
Note: When removing the ADF separation holder, take care not to let the spring bounce
off.
ADF separation holder
ADF separation spring
Document cover ASSY
(3_055)

(21) Remove the three screws and take the scanner hinge support off the document cover ASSY.
Document cover ASSY

(3_056)
3-61
Confidential

(22) Press the lock arm to the rear to release the rear end of the document detection sensor PCB
and remove the PCB ASSY. Then disconnect the document detection sensor harness from
the PCB and release the harness from the cable guide provided on the ADF unit.
Document detection
sensor PCB ASSY
Cable guide
Document detection
Lock arm
(Rear)
(Left)
ADF harness ASSY

(3_057)
Assembling Note: As shown below, route the document detection sensor harness through
cable guide "a." After taped together with the ADF motor harness, it is called ADF harness
ASSY. Further route the harness ASSY through cable guide "b."
Cable guide "a"
Document detection sensor harness (white)
ADF motor harness

Cable guide "b"
ADF harness ASSY
3-62
(3_010)
Confidential
Document scanning position sensor PCB ASSY

(23) Turn the ADF unit right side up.
(24) Press the lock arm to the front to release the front end of the document scanning position
sensor PCB and remove the PCB ASSY. Then disconnect the document scanning position
sensor harness from the PCB and release the harness from the cable guide provided on the
ADF unit
Document scanning
ADF unit
Lock arm
ADF motor
(Left)
Document scanning
(Rear)
(3_058)
ADF harness ASSY

(Bundle of ADF motor harness and its grounding wire,
document detection sensor harness, and
document scanning position sensor harness)
ADF drive unit
Assembling Note: As shown below, route the document scanning position sensor harness
through cable guide "c." After taped together with the ADF harness ASSY, further route it
through cable guide "d."
Document scanning
position actuator
Cable guide "d"
Cable guide "c"
ADF unit
Document scanning
Document scanning
Grounding wire
ADF motor harness (blue)
Document detection
Document scanning
(3_011)
ADF harness ASSY
3-63
Confidential
ADF motor
(25) Remove the screw (that secures the ADF motor together with the grounding wire), slightly
rotate the ADF motor counterclockwise to release it from the boss on the ADF drive unit,
and remove the ADF motor.
(26) Disconnect the ADF motor harness from the motor.
ADF motor harness

Grounding wire
Screw, pan
(s/p washer)
M3x6
ADF unit
Boss
ADF motor harness
ADF motor
(Rear)
(Left)
ADF drive unit

ADF harness ASSY
(Bundle of ADF motor harness and
its grounding wire, document detection
sensor harness, and document scanning
position sensor harness)
(Rear)
Cable guides "x"
Grounding wire
ADF motor
(3_059)
Viewed from the top
Assembling Note: Connect the ADF motor harness to the motor and route it through two cable
guides "x" as shown above. Secure the ADF motor together with the grounding wire to the ADF
drive unit with the screw.
3-64
Confidential
ADF drive unit

(27) Remove gear 36/54 by releasing its latch, then remove the separation roller gear (outer) and
idle gear 56.
(28) Remove gear 31 by releasing its latch.
(29) Remove the bushing from each of the document feed roller shafts 1 and 2.
ADF unit
Separation roller gear

(Outer)
(Left)
(Rear)

Latch
Bushings
Gear 36/54
Latch
Idle gear 56
Gear 31
ADF harness ASSY

(3_060)
Assembling Note: Set the ADF-related gears into place as shown below.
Grounding wire
ADF motor
harness

(Outer)
(Left)
(Rear)
Gear 36/54
Idle gear 56
Gear 31
3-65
ADF harness ASSY

(3_061)
Confidential
(30) Remove the three screws from the ADF drive unit.
(31) On the underside of the ADF drive unit, press the lock arm to release the separation roller
gear (inner), and pull the ADF drive unit off the ADF unit.
(32) Remove the ADF motor harness from the ADF unit.
Opening
ADF unit
(Front)

(Inner)
(Left)
Lock arm
Taptite, cup B
M3x10
ADF drive unit
ADF harness ASSY
ADF motor harness

(Inner)
(3_062)
Assembling Note: Before mounting the ADF drive unit on the ADF unit, pass the ADF
harness ASSY through the opening (see above) provided in the ADF unit and route it through
cable guide "b" (shown on page 3-62) on the underside of the ADF unit.
When mounting the ADF drive unit, route the ADF motor harness and its grounding wire
through cable guides "x" (shown on page 3-64).
3-66
Confidential
Document pick-up roller and document separation roller

(33) Turn the ADF unit upside down.
(34) Remove the screw from the document roller holder.
(35) Release the two tabs on the document roller holder from the ADF unit and take up the
holder.
(36) Remove the document pick-up roller and document separation roller from the document
roller holder.

Apply grease here.
Apply grease here.
Taptite, cup B
M3x8
Tabs
(Left)
(3_063)
Assembling Note: Before mounting the document roller holder on the ADF unit, apply the
specified lubricant to the roller shafts, referring to Section 5 in this chapter.
3-67
Confidential
9.7
Control Panel ASSY

(1) Remove three screws "a" from the control panel ASSY.
(2) Slightly pull up the rear end of the control panel ASSY and press the front end to the rear to
separate the ASSY from the upper cover.
Note: Do not pull the control panel ASSY away from the machine since it is connected to
the machine with harnesses.
(3) Slightly lift up the control panel ASSY, disconnect the panel harness and touch panel
harness*1 from the main PCB, and release them from their cable guides.
(4) Disconnect the LCD flat cable from the main PCB.
Note: After disconnecting the flat cable, check that it is not damaged at its end or shortcircuited. When connecting the flat cable, do not insert it at an angle. After insertion, check
again that it is not at an angle.
(5) Models with touch panel Release the grounding wire*1 by removing screw "b"*1 and
remove it from the cable guides.
MFC with touch panel
"a"
Control panel ASSY

"a"
"a"
"b" *1
Grounding wire *1
LCD flat cable
Touch panel harness *1
"a": Taptite, cup B M3x10
"b": Taptite, cup S M3x6*1
Upper cover
(3_064_MFCJ825DW)
Panel harness
Assembling Notes:
Route the panel harness, touch panel harness*1 and grounding wire*1 through cable guides
(circled with a dashed line).
After mounting the control panel ASSY, check that there is no gap between the front end of
the control panel ASSY and that of the upper cover.
3-68
Confidential
MFC without touch panel

"a"
Control panel ASSY

"a"
"a"
LCD flat cable

Upper cover
Panel harness
(3_064_MFCJ430W)
DCP

"a"
Control panel ASSY

"a"
"a"
"b"
Grounding wire *1
LCD flat cable

Panel harness

"b": Taptite, cup S M3x6*1
Upper cover
(3_064_DCPJ525W)
3-69
Confidential
9.8
Disassembly of Control Panel ASSY

(The control panel ASSY contains the document scanner open actuator.)
(1) Turn the control panel ASSY upside down.
(2) Models with touch panel & 1.9-inch LCD Disconnect the LED harness from the panel
PCB.
(3) MFC Release the five latches (three "x" and two "y" latches).
DCP Release three latches "x."
Then remove the panel PCB ASSY.
(4) MFC Remove the two rubber keys.
DCP Remove the rubber key.
(5) Release latch "z" provided on the control panel base and remove the document scanner
open actuator together with its spring.
(6) MFC without touch panel Remove the LCD unit.
(7) DCP Remove the EX panel plate.
*2 For models with touch panel & 1.9-inch LCD
Panel harness
Actuator spring
Rubber key L
Panel PCB ASSY

Rubber key R
Touch panel
harness *1
LED harness *2
Tab
Tab
Latch "z"
Document
scanner open
actuator
Tab
Latches "y"
LCD flat cable
Tab
Control panel base (Bottom side)

Grounding wire *1
Latch "z"
Latches "x"
3-70
(3_065_MFCJ825DW)
Confidential
Panel harness
Panel PCB ASSY

Actuator spring
Rubber key L
Rubber key R
LCD unit
Tabs
Latches
Latch "z"
Tabs
Document
scanner open
actuator
Latches "y"
Latch "z"
(3_065_MFCJ430W)
Latches "x"
DCP
Panel harness
Actuator spring
Panel PCB ASSY
Rubber key
LED harness *2
Touch panel
harness *1
Tab
Latch "z"
Document
scanner open
actuator
Tab
LCD flat cable

Control panel base (Bottom side)
Grounding wire *1
Latch "z"
Latches "x"
(3_065_DCPJ525W)
EX panel plate
3-71
Confidential
Assembling Notes:
After mounting the document scanner open actuator, check that the actuator springs back if
pressed with a finger.
When mounting the control panel PCB ASSY, first fit it below the four tabs on the control
panel base and then secure it with the four latches (see the previous page). Make sure that the
cable linking the two PCBs is threaded through the cable guide as shown below.

Cable guide
Panel PCB ASSY
Control panel base

LED
harness *2
Panel harness
LCD flat cable
Grounding wire
Touch panel harness
*1
(3_066_MFCJ825DW)

Panel harness
Panel PCB ASSY
Control panel base

LCD flat cable
(3_066_MFCJ430W)
3-72
Confidential
DCP
Panel PCB ASSY
Panel harness
Cable guides
Control panel base
LED harness *2
Grounding wire *1
LCD flat cable

(3_066_DCPJ525W)
(8) Models with touch panel Remove the two screws and take the LCD unit out of the control
panel base.
Touch panel harness
*1
LCD flat cable

Taptite, cup B M3x8
LCD unit
Grounding wire *1
Control panel base
Pawls
(3_067)
3-73
Confidential
9.9
Speaker*, Front Cover and Wireless LAN PCB

(1) Disconnect the speaker harness* from the main PCB and release it from the cable guides
provided on the upper cover.
(2) Pull out the speaker spring (wire spring)* and take the speaker* out of the pocket provided
on the upper cover.
* For models with speaker
Speaker spring *
Speaker *
Main PCB
Upper cover
Cable guide
Main PCB
Speaker *
Cable guide
Speaker harness *
Upper cover
(3_069)
Assembling Note: After mounting the speaker* and its spring* into the pocket provided on the
upper cover, route the speaker harness* through the cable guides on the upper cover as shown
above.
3-74
Confidential
(3) Remove the screw (that secures the front cover and upper cover together to the lower
cover).
(4) On the inside of the front cover, lightly pull up the retainer to release it from the boss on the
upper cover, slightly pull the front cover up and towards you to remove the front cover
together with the wireless LAN PCB.
(5) Disconnect the harness from the wireless LAN PCB.
Taptite, bind B
M4x12
Retainer
Boss
Front cover
Upper cover
(3_070)
Hooks
9
(6) Release the latch on the front cover and remove the wireless LAN PCB.
Wireless LAN PCB
Hooks
Front cover
Latch
(3_071)
Assembling Note: When mounting the front cover, route the wireless LAN PCB harness
through the upper opening provided in the lower cover, fit the two hooks into the lower
openings, and set the front cover into place while lifting it up slightly.
3-75
Confidential
9.10 Upper Cover, Ink Cartridge Cover and Media Module Cover
(1) Open the ink cartridge cover.
(2) Remove the five screws (four screws if the front cover has been removed in the previous
section) from the upper cover.
(3) Hold the right and left sides of the upper cover and lift it up and off the lower cover.
Note: Do not put your hands into the opening above the platen (shown below). Doing so
may damage or stain the CR encoder strip inside.
Taptite, bind B
M4x12
Opening above the platen
* This screw has been removed

for removal of the front cover
in Section 9.9.
*
Upper cover
Hooks
Hooks
CR encoder strip
PF encoder disc
Ink cartridge cover
Lower cover
(3_072)
Assembling Notes:
When mounting the upper cover:
- Make sure that the ink cartridge cover is opened.
- Make sure that the head/carriage unit is placed in the head capping position (home
position). This prevents the ink supply tubes from getting crushed between the upper and
lower covers.
(If the head/carriage unit remains removed in Section 9.3, take care not to crush the ink
supply tubes or carriage flat cables between the upper and lower covers.)
- Take care not to deform the PF encoder disc.
- Be sure to fit the hooks provided on the inside of the upper cover into the groove in the
lower cover.
After mounting the upper cover, check that the PF encoder disc is not bent or deformed.
3-76
Confidential
(4) Slightly lift up the front end of the lower cover, open the ink cartridge cover fully, warp the
cover arm downwards to release it from the slit in the lower cover, and then remove the
right and left bosses on the ink cartridge cover downwards from the lower cover.
(5) For disc printing models Push down the disc guide and pull it towards you.
(6) Release the latches on the media module cover from the lower cover and pull it out to the
front.
(7) Pull the lock arm of the media module cover outwards and remove the status lens.
Slit
Socket
Latch
Cover arm
Socket
Boss
Status
lens
Boss
Latch
Disc guide
Ink cartridge
cover
Media module cover

Lock arm
Status lens
(3_073)
Assembling Note: When mounting the ink cartridge cover, hold it in a fully opened position, fit
the right and left bosses into the sockets in the lower cover from bottom up, and insert the cover
arm into the slit while warping it down.
3-77
Confidential
9.11 Main PCB

Caution: Before replacement of the main PCB, back up the machine information and user
setting information (refer to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.12 "Backup of Machine Information
(Function code 46) (User-accessible)" and the head calibration data (refer to Chapter 5,
Section 1.4.23 "Updating of Head Property Data and Backup/Restoration of Head
Calibration Data (Function code 68)." After replacement, restore the backed up
information to the new PCB. Failure to do so requires replacing also the ink absorber box
and flushing box after replacement of the main PCB.
Caution: Before accessing the main PCB, make sure that the power cord is unplugged from the
electrical outlet and the telephone line (MFC only) is disconnected; otherwise, an electric shock
could occur.
Vorsicht: Bevor Sie auf das Mainboard zugreifen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der Netzstecker aus
der Netzsteckdose gezogen und das Telefonkabel entfernt ist. Andernfalls kann es zu einem
Stromschlag kommen.
Caution: At the time of removal of the main PCB, untightening screws should be preceded by
disconnection of the harnesses and flat cables, and at the time of installation, connection of the
harnesses and flat cables, by tightening of screws. Observing this sequence prevents harnesses
and flat cables from getting crushed or damaged by screws or screwdrivers.
(1) Disconnect the following harnesses and flat cables from the main PCB.
Caution: Do not remove the screws from the main PCB before disconnecting harnesses
and flat cables.
Note: After disconnecting the flat cables, check that each cable is not damaged at its end or
short-circuited. When connecting the flat cables, do not insert them at an angle. After
insertion, check again that they are not at an angle.
-
Disc guide sensor harness (2-wire)*1

High-yield ink cartridge sensor flat cable (7-wire)
Ink remaining sensor flat cable (9-wire)
Ink cartridge detection sensor flat cable (8-wire)
Ink cartridge cover sensor harness (2-wire)
Purge cam switch harness (2-wire)
ASF* encoder sensor harness (4-wire) (*Auto Sheet Feeder)
Pressure roller release sensor harness (3-wire)
Carriage flat cable 4 (9-wire)
Carriage motor harness (2-wire)
ASF* motor harness (2-wire)
MJ (EXT) harness (2-wire)*2
Paper feed motor harness (2-wire)
PF/registration sensor harness ASSY (7-wire)
Power supply harness (6-wire)
Wireless LAN PCB harness (4-wire)
*2 For MFC only
3-78
Confidential
Main PCB B57U081
* For MFC only
(Document detection
sensor harness (white))
ASF motor harness (2-wire)
(3-wire)
(Document
MJ (LINE) harness *
scanning position
(2-wire, yellow)
sensor harness (red))
(3-wire)
(Document
scanner motor
harness)
(4-wire)

(CIS flat cable) (16-wire)
(USB interface)
(LAN interface)
Carriage
flat cable 4
(9-wire)
(ADF motor
harness)
(4-wire)
Pressure roller
release
sensor harness
(3-wire)
Carriage flat cable 2

(7-wire)
ASF encoder
sensor harness
(4-wire)
Purge cam
switch harness
(2-wire)
MJ (EXT)
harness *
(2-wire, black)
Paper feed
motor harness
(2-wire)
Power supply
harness
(6-wire)
Wireless LAN
PCB harness
(4-wire)
Main PCB
Ink cartridge
cover sensor
harness
(2-wire)
Disc guide
sensor harness
(2-wire)
PF/registration sensor (Speaker harness)

harness ASSY
(Touch panel
(2-wire)
(7-wire)
harness)
(Panel harness) (4-wire)
(7-wire)
LCD flat cable

(27-wire)
For debugging at the factory.
Do not disturb it.
Ink cartridge detection

sensor flat cable (8-wire)
Ink remaining sensor
flat cable (9-wire)
High-yield ink cartridge
(B57U081)
Main PCB B57U082

(Document detection
sensor harness (white)) *2 ASF motor harness (2-wire)
(3-wire)
(Document scanning
position sensor
(2-wire, yellow)
harness (red)) *2
(3-wire)
(Document
scanner motor
harness)
(4-wire)
(USB interface)
Carriage
flat cable 4
(9-wire)
(ADF motor
harness) *2
(4-wire)
MJ (EXT)
harness *1
(2-wire, black)

(CIS flat cable) (12-wire)
Carriage flat cable 2

(7-wire)
Main PCB
Paper feed
motor harness
(2-wire)
Power supply
harness
(6-wire)
Wireless LAN
PCB harness
(4-wire)
harness ASSY
(7-wire)
Pressure roller
release sensor
harness
(3-wire)
ASF encoder
sensor harness
(4-wire)
Purge cam
switch harness
(2-wire)
Ink cartridge
cover sensor
harness
(2-wire)
(Speaker harness)
(2-wire)
(Panel harness)
(7-wire)
(Touch panel
harness) *3
(4-wire)

Ink remaining sensor
flat cable (9-wire)
High-yield ink cartridge
(B57U082)
LCD flat cable

(20-wire)
For debugging at the factory.
Do not disturb it.
*1 For MFC only

3-79
Confidential
(2) Remove the four screws (main PCB B57U081) or three screws (main PCB B57U082) and
take the main PCB shield up and off the main PCB.
(3) Unlatch the SDAA enclosure by pinching its right and left sides and remove it from the
main PCB.
(4) Disconnect the MJ (LINE) harness (2-wire, yellow)* from the main PCB and remove it
from the cable guide on the SDAA cover*.
* For MFC only
Main PCB B57U082
Main PCB B57U081
Taptite, cup S
M3x6
Taptite, cup S
M3x6
Main PCB shield
Main PCB shield
SDAA cover *
MJ (LINE) harness *
(yellow)
Main PCB

(3_074)
3-80
Confidential
Assembling Note: Before securing the main PCB shield, route the harnesses on the top of the
lower cover as shown below. Make sure that the MJ (LINE) harness* is routed through the
SDAA cover*. Gather the slack of the MJ (LINE) harness* around section "X" shown below.
(See the illustration given on page 3-84 for the routing of those harnesses on the left side of the
lower cover.)
* For MFC only
MJ (LINE) harness *
(yellow)
ASF motor harness
Section
"X"
Carriage motor
harness
MJ (EXT) harness *
(black)
Main PCB
Paper feed motor
harness
(3_013)
Lower cover
PF/registration
sensor harness ASSY
3-81
Confidential
(5) Remove one screw "a" (main PCB B57U081) or three screws "a" (main PCB B57U082)
from the main PCB, then lift up the PCB and its insulation sheet.
(6) Remove two screws "b" (that secure the PS/MJ shield unit together) from the main PCB
frame, then lift it up.
* For MFC only
B57U082
"a"
B57U081
SDAA cover*
"a"
"a"
"a"
Main PCB
"b"
"b"
Main PCB
insulation
sheet
"b"
"b"
Main PCB
frame
Lower cover
"a": Taptite, cup S M3x6
"b": Screw, bind M3x6
(3_075)
Assembling Note: If you replace the main PCB, you need to load programs onto the flash
ROM, restore the machine information and head calibration data that have been backed up in an
external memory, and make specified adjustments of various settings (refer to Chapter 4,
Section 2 "IF YOU REPLACE THE MAIN PCB"). Before starting, make sure that the head/
carriage unit is mounted.
3-82
Confidential
9.12 PS/MJ Shield Unit (MJ PCB*1 and Power Supply PCB)
*1 For MFC only
(1) If the main PCB frame has not been removed, disconnect the power supply harness, MJ
(LINE) harness*1 and MJ (EXT) harness*1 from the main PCB, then remove two screws
"b" (shown on the previous page) from the main PCB frame.
(2) Remove the two screws shown below.
(3) Pull the ferrite core of the MJ (LINE) harness*1 out of the core holder.
Note: If the ferrite core is secured to the lower cover with a band instead of a core holder,
cut it off and release the MJ (LINE) harness.
(4) Release the power supply harness, MJ (LINE) harness*1 and MJ (EXT) harness*1 from the
cable guides on the lower cover.
(5) As shown below, press lock "x" on the PS/MJ shield unit to release it from pawl "y" on the
lower cover, then remove the PS/MJ shield unit from the bottom of the lower cover.
Core holder
Screw, bind M3x6
and its ferrite core
PS/MJ shield unit

Lower cover
Pawl "y"
Ferrite core *2
(yellow)
Lock "x"
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
Lock "x"
Pawl "y" provided

on the lower cover
U-shaped cutout
Lower cover
3-83
(3_076)
Confidential
Assembling Notes:
Before mounting the PS/MJ shield unit on the lower cover, pass the power supply harness
through the U-shaped cutout (shown on the previous page) provided in the lower PS/MJ
frame.
After mounting the PS/MJ shield unit on the lower cover, check that lock "x" is caught on
pawl "y" provided on the lower cover.
After mounting the PS/MJ shield unit, route the power supply harness, MJ (LINE) harness*1
and MJ (EXT) harness*1 through the cable guides as shown below.
If the ferrite core of the MJ (LINE) harness*1 had been secured to the lower cover with a
band and the band was cut off, use a new band to secure the ferrite core.
*1 For MFC only
ASF motor harness
SDAA cover *1
Carriage motor
harness
Power supply
harness
PF/registration
sensor harness
ASSY
MJ (LINE)
harness *1
(yellow)
PF/registration
sensor harness
ASSY
Main PCB
Wireless LAN PCB

harness
(Left)
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
(3_014)
Grounding wire
3-84
Confidential
(6) For 100 V series As shown below, unlatch the power cord bush and pull it up from the AC
cord holder. Then release the power cord from the cable guides provided on the AC cord
holder (shown on page 3-87).
(7) Release the power supply shield from the lock and two stoppers on the lower PS/MJ frame
and pull it up.
(8) Disconnect the power supply harness from the power supply PCB.
(9) Remove three screws "c," take the power supply PCB and PS PCB insulator off the lower
PS/MJ frame, and then remove the power supply harness from the lower PS/MJ frame.
(10) For 100 V series Remove screw "a" and take the MJ shield off the lower PS/MJ frame.
For 200 V series Remove screw "a" (that secures the MJ shield and power inlet) and
screw "d" (that secures the grounding wire). Then take the MJ shield and power inlet off
the lower PS/MJ frame.
Note: If the EXT cap has not been removed, remove it beforehand.
(11) Remove the AC cord holder.
Note: If the AC cord holder has a band, cut it off.
(12) Disconnect the MJ (LINE) harness*1 and MJ (EXT) harness*1 from the MJ PCB*1 and
release them from the cable guide on the MJ PCB insulator.
(13) Remove screw "b" and take the MJ PCB*1 and MJ PCB insulator off the lower PS/MJ
frame.
"a"
MJ shield
*1 For MFC only

*2 Two ferrite cores on 100 V
series with main PCB
B57U082
MJ PCB *1
"b"
Ferrite core(s) *2
(yellow)
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
CN1
CN2
MJ PCB insulator *1
Power cord bush

Cable guide
Power supply shield
Power cord
Latch
Slit
PS PCB
insulator
"c"
AC cord holder
"c"
"c"
Grounding wire
"d"
"a"
Lower
PS/MJ frame
Bent section
Power supply PCB
Lock
Power inlet
MJ shield
Stoppers
(3_077)

Ferrite core
"a" and "e": Screw, bind M3x6

"b" and "c": Taptite, cup S M3x6
"d": Screw, pan (washer), M4x8DB
200 V series
3-85
Confidential
Assembling Notes:
Before mounting the MJ shield, route the MJ (LINE) harness*1 and MJ (EXT) harness*1
through the cable guides on the MJ PCB insulator as shown on the next page.
When setting the PS PCB insulator back into place, first pass the power cord through the
insulator, fit the right end "f" into the cutout provided in the lower MJ/PS frame and fit the
left end "g" over the edge of the lower PS/MJ frame.
When mounting the power supply shield on the lower PS/MJ frame, set the outwardly bent
section of the right edge under the stoppers on the frame, set the front edge inside the front
rib on the frame, and fit the shield under the lock of the frame so that the lock secures the slit
in the top of the shield.
For AC cord holders having a band After putting the power cord into the AC cord holder,
set a band into place.
*1 For MFC only
*2 For models with main PCB
B57U082
Lower PS/MJ frame

Fit left end "g"
over here.
Power supply PCB
MJ shield
PS PCB insulator
(Right)
Power cord
Fit right end "f" in here.
Lock
(Left)
Ferrite core *2
Lower PS/MJ
frame
(yellow)
Cable guide on the
MJ PCB insulator
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
(3_016)
PS PCB insulator
Stoppers on the
lower PS/MJ frame
Power supply shield
Outwardly bent section

of the power supply shield
(Left)
Ferrite core *2
(yellow)
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
Cable guide on the

MJ PCB insulator
Lock
Power supply
harness
3-86
(3_015)
Front rib of the lower

PS/MJ frame
(The front end of the power supply
shield should be set inside the front
rib of the lower PS/MJ frame.)
Confidential
*1 For MFC only

100 V series
Ferrite core
Power cord bush
Power cord
MJ PCB *1
Cable guides
MJ (EXT) harness *1
(black)
Ferrite core *2
(yellow)
Power supply PCB
Power supply shield

(3_017)
200 V series
Ferrite core
Power inlet
Power cord
MJ PCB *1
Cable guides
MJ (EXT) harness
(black)
*1
Ferrite core *2
(yellow)
Power supply PCB
Power supply shield

(3_018)
Note for models with a power inlet having a built-in fuse

If the fuse built in the power inlet has blown, the power supply PCB could also be
damaged. Be sure to replace the whole power supply PCB ASSY, not just the fuse. Never
use any substitute or short-circuit the fuse terminals with conductors. Using a power inlet
with an unauthorized fuse will cause a fire or accident.
3-87
Confidential
9.13 CR Encoder Strip and its Guard Film

CR encoder strip
(1) At the left end of the CR frame, push the rear end of the encoder strip spring inwards,
unhook the left end of the CR encoder strip from the spring, and then unhook the right end
from the CR frame.
(2) Turn the CR encoder strip in the direction of the arrow shown below, align the rectangular
hole in the left end of the strip with the boss of the strip support and take the strip off.
Remove the encoder strip spring.
Note: Take care not to scratch or damage the encoder strip. If it is stained or damaged,
replace it.
This should point up.
CR encoder strip
Encoder strip spring
Lower cover
Strip support
CR frame
(3_078)
Assembling Note: Set the CR encoder strip so that the -marked end is to the right (carriage
motor side) and the mark points upwards as shown above.
3-88
Confidential
Encoder strip guard film

(3) At the right end of the CR frame, push the rear end of the guard film spring inwards,
unhook the right end of the encoder strip guard film from the spring, and then unhook the
left end from the CR frame.
(4) Turn the encoder guard film in the direction of the arrow shown below, align the
rectangular hole in the right end of the film with the boss of the strip support and take the
film off. Remove the guard film spring.
Encoder strip guard film

Guard film spring
Strip support
Lower cover
(3_079)
3-89
Confidential
9.14 Carriage PCB ASSY, Ink Refill ASSY and Ink Cartridge Detection Sensor
PCB
Carriage PCB ASSY (Carriage PCB with carriage flat cables)
(1) Remove the carriage PCB ASSY from the head/carriage unit, by performing steps (7)
through (11) in Section 9.3 "Head/Carriage Unit."
(2) Release the carriage flat cables from the cable guides on the tube support plate and take
them out together with the flat core.
Note: When replacing the carriage PCB ASSY, remove the flat core from the old carriage
flat cables and set it to the new ones.
Carriage PCB ASSY
Flat core
CR guide rail
Tube support plate

(3_080)
3-90
Confidential
Assembling Note: When mounting the carriage PCB ASSY, route the carriage flat cables as
shown below.
Pull here to unlock.
Head flexible cable
Head/carriage unit
Connector
Carriage PCB ASSY

Film
Carriage PCB ASSY
Lock spring
Carriage flat
cables
Upper cover
Hole
Head/carriage unit
Boss
(3_081)
Head flexible cable
Folded section
Ferrite core
Pocket
Lower cover
Boss
Cable guides
Tube/cable guide
Tube support wire
(3_019)
Tube support plate
3-91
Confidential
Ink refill ASSY and ink cartridge detection sensor PCB

(3) Remove the ink supply tubes from the head/carriage unit, by performing steps (12) through
(14) in Section 9.3 "Head/Carriage Unit."
(4) Release the four ink supply tubes from the tube guides on the tube support plate, remove
the sponge, and then release them from the tube support wire.
(5) Take the ink absorber box out of the lower cover.
(6) If the main PCB has not been removed, disconnect the three ink-related sensor flat cables
(ink cartridge detection sensor, high-yield ink cartridge sensor and ink remaining sensor
flat cables) from the main PCB.
Head joint
Ink cartridge detection sensor PCB
Ink supply tubes
Protective part
Ink refill ASSY
Ink-related sensor
flat cables
Ink absorber box
Black
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta
Lower cover
Cable guide for
ink-related sensor
flat cables
Sponge
Tube clamp (1)

Tube clamp (2)
Black
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta
Tube guides
Black
(Rear)
Tube support plate
Bent section of tube support wire
3-92
Yellow
Cyan
Magenta
(3_083)
Confidential
Assembling Notes:
When binding ink supply tubes with two tube clamps, align four ink supply tubes in the order
of Magenta, Cyan, Yellow, and Black from bottom to up, as shown on the previous page.
Bind magenta, cyan, and yellow ink tubes from the bottom with tube clamp (1) at the right
side (viewed from the front), and then bind black, yellow, and cyan ink tubes from the top
with tube clamp (2) at the left side.
After mounting the ink refill ASSY, route all of the four ink supply tubes through the tube
guides on the tube support plate, aligning the four colors in the order shown on the previous
page, without overlapping each other. Next, put the sponge into place and pass the ink supply
tubes through the bent section of the tube support wire.
When securing the head joint to the head/carriage unit with the head joint spring, route all of
the four ink supply tubes in front of the guide boss as shown below.
Head joint spring
Head/carriage unit
Guide boss
Ink supply tubes
Head joint spring
Head joint
Head joint
PF encoder disc
Head joint rubber
Head/carriage unit
(3_084)
Upper cover
3-93
Confidential
(7) Release the three ink-related sensor flat cables from the cable guide (shown on page 3-92)
on the lower cover.
(8) Lift the ink refill ASSY up and out of the lower cover.
Note: Do not remove the protective part under the current state. Doing so causes ink in the
ink supply tubes to flow out.
Note: On the back of the ink refill ASSY is an ink absorber felt (for ink refill ASSY) that
may be stained with ink. If it is excessively stained, replace it.
(9) Remove the screw and take the ink cartridge detection sensor PCB up and off the ink refill
ASSY.
Taptite, cup B M3x8
sensor PCB
flat cable
High-yield ink cartridge sensor

flat cable
Ink remaining sensor flat cable
Ink refill ASSY
Protective part
(3_085)
Assembling Note: When replacing the ink cartridge detection sensor PCB ASSY, bend its flat
cable as specified below.
Reference
line
UL symbol
Conductor for print side
connection
Valley fold, 180
Mountain fold,
180
Mountain fold,
180
Mountain fold, 180
Reference
line
Mountain fold, 180
(3_085_1)
3-94
Confidential
Tube support plate and tube support wire

(10) Release the five harnesses (carriage motor harness, ASF motor harness, pressure roller
release sensor harness, ASF encoder sensor harness and purge cam switch harness) routed
on the tube support plate from the cable guides on the plate.
Engine unit
Tube support plate

ASF encoder sensor harness
Pressure roller release sensor harness
Lower cover
ASF motor harness

(3_086)
3-95
Confidential
(11) Pull up the tab on the tube support plate to release the boss on the underside from the lower
cover, slide the plate to the right, and take it up and off the lower cover together with the
tube support wire.
(12) Remove the tube support wire from the tube support plate.
Tab (Boss provided on the

underside)
Tube support wire
Tube support plate
Ink absorber box
Lower cover
(3_087)
3-96
Confidential
9.15 Ink Absorber Box and Ink Absorber Felt (for Ink Refill ASSY)
Note: Do not remove the ink absorber box unless it needs to be replaced.
Note: If the main drain tube and air vent tube are disconnected from the ink absorber box for
replacement of the ink absorber box, they are reusable only one time by trimming their ends
vertically 10 mm with scissors clear and free of oil. Check that their cut surfaces are free of oil.
(1) Pull out the main drain tube and air vent tube from the ink absorber box. If it is the first
time for those tubes to be disconnected, trim their ends to make them reusable. If it is the
second time, those tubes need to be replaced.
Note: Pinch the end of each tube with a clip in order to prevent drained ink from leaking
and the machine from getting stained with leaked ink.
Note: Do not place those tubes that have been pulled out on the main PCB. If the PCB is
stained with leaked ink, wipe it off with a dry cloth.
(2) Remove the ink absorber box from the lower cover and immediately set a new one.
(3) To use the current tubes again, connect them (trimmed in step (1)) to the new ink absorber
box.
To replace those tubes, pull them off the joints on the rear of the maintenance unit and
connect new tubes to the joints and new ink absorber box.
Note: If the ink absorber box or its surroundings are stained with ink, wipe them off with a
cloth.
(4) Take the ink absorber felt (for ink refill ASSY) out of the lower cover.
Viewed from the right

Main drain tube
ASF drive ASSY
Ink absorber box
Air vent tube

Correct
Maintenance unit
Ink absorber felt
Wrong
Main drain tube
(for ink refill ASSY) Do not connect the main
drain tube at an angle.

Connect the tube
all the way seated.
(3_088)
Lower cover
3-97
Confidential
Assembling Notes:
When connecting the main drain tube and air vent tube to the ink absorber box, take care not
to connect them at an angle. Tubes connected at an angle come off easily, resulting in ink
leakage. After connection, check that there is no ink leakage.
If you replace the ink absorber box (without replacing the main PCB), reset the purge count,
referring to Chapter 4, Section 4.
It is also recommended that the flushing box be replaced and the flushing count be reset as
necessary since the flushing count may approach the upper limit.
3-98
Confidential
9.16 Engine Unit and Flushing Box

During disassembly jobs, except when removing the ink refill ASSY or engine unit (including
the maintenance unit), leave the head/carriage unit in the machine.
When removing the head/carriage unit, ink refill ASSY or engine unit, you need beforehand to
remove all four ink cartridges and set the protective part instead (see page 3-34).
(1) If the PS/MJ shield unit has not been removed, you need to remove two screws shown on
page 3-83.
(2) On the right end of the lower cover, release the six harnesses (carriage motor harness, ASF
motor harness, ASF encoder sensor harness, pressure roller release sensor harness, purge
cam switch harness and ink cartridge cover sensor harness) from the cable guides.
Carriage motor
ASF motor
ASF motor/encoder PCB
sensor harness
ASF encoder disc

ASF motor harness
sensor harness
ASF encoder sensor harness
ASF encoder
harness
Purge cam
switch harness

(Right)
ASF motor harness
Lower cover

3-99
(3_090)
Confidential
(3) On the left end of the lower cover, release the two harnesses (paper feed motor harness and
PF/registration sensor harness ASSY) from the cable guides.
(4) Remove the four screws from the engine unit.
(5) Hold the inner chute located beneath the CR guide rail, lift up the rear end of the engine
unit slightly, and then take it up and out of the lower cover.
Note: Do not hold the CR guide rail.
Note: Take care not to touch the PF encoder disc.
Note: If the ink absorber box does not need to be replaced, be sure to take it out of the
lower cover together with the engine unit. If the main drain tube and air vent tube are
disconnected from the ink absorber box, they are reusable only one time by trimming their
ends vertically 10 mm with scissors clear and free of oil. Check that their cut surfaces are
free of oil. If it is the second time for those tubes to be disconnected, they need to be
replaced.
Note: Do not place the engine unit directly on a flat surface; doing so may break the PF
encoder disc and gears. Be sure to place a support pad under the engine unit as shown
below.
(6) Take the flushing box and ink absorber felt (for maintenance unit) out of the lower cover.
PF encoder disc
Taptite, cup B
M3x10
Engine unit
Support pad
Link
rod R
Engine unit
PF encoder disc
ASF encoder harness
ASF motor harness
ASF motor/
encoder harness
ASSY

Paper feed
motor harness
harness ASSY
Link
rod L

Ink absorber felt
Boss
(on the disc guide)
Flushing box
(3_091)
Boss
(on the disc guide)
Lower cover
3-100
Confidential
Assembling Notes:
When mounting the engine unit on the lower cover, first make sure that the disc guide is
closed, then slightly tilt the engine unit to the front, fit the grooves provided in the inside of
the link rods R and L (white parts) over the bosses on the disc guide (see the previous page),
slide the engine unit down, press the front end against the lower cover and lower the rear end.
After mounting the engine unit, route the harnesses through the cable guides on the right and
left ends of the lower cover. (See the figure below and the next page.)
If you replace the flushing box (without replacing the main PCB), you also need to reset the
flushing count, referring to Chapter 4, Section 4.
If you replace the engine unit, make adjustments specified in Chapter 4, Section 1.
Carriage motor
ASF motor
ASF motor/encoder
PCB
ASF encoder disc
Pressure roller
release sensor
harness
ASF encoder
sensor harness
Purge cam
switch
harness
ASF motor harness

Pressure roller
release sensor
harness
ASF encoder
sensor harness
Ferrite core of
ASF motor harness
(Right)
Ferrite core of
carriage motor harness
ASF motor harness

Lower cover
(3_022)
3-101
Confidential
PF encoder disc
PF/registration sensor harness ASSY
Lower cover
Registration
sensor harness
Lower cover
ASF motor
harness
Carriage
motor harness
harness ASSY

ASF encoder harness
3-102
(3_096)
Confidential
9.17 Components on the Engine Unit

(Earth spring, Maintenance unit, Carriage motor, Outer paper guide, Chute cover, Registration
sensor PCB ASSY, Inner chute ASSY, Pressure roller release sensor PCB ASSY, PF encoder
disc, PF encoder sensor PCB ASSY and PF/registration sensor harness ASSY)
Earth spring
(1) Release the upper and lower ends of the earth spring from the CR guide rail and the ASF
motor, respectively.
CR guide rail
Earth spring
Maintenance unit
(Rear)
CR guide rail
Earth spring
ASF motor
(3_097)
Assembling Note: When mounting the earth spring, take care not to contaminate it with grease.
First insert the lower end of the spring underneath the ASF motor, and the spring winds around
the ASF motor by spring force. Then hook the upper end on the CR guide rail.
3-103
Confidential
Maintenance unit
(2) Release the left end of the switching lever guide from the maintenance unit (viewed from
the rear) and remove the guide.
(3) If the ink absorber box has not been removed, pull out the main drain tube and air vent tube
from the ink absorber box.
Note: Pinch the end of each tube with a clip in order to prevent drained ink from leaking
and the machine from getting stained with leaked ink.
Note: If the main drain tube and air vent tube are disconnected from the ink absorber box,
they are reusable only one time by trimming their ends vertically 10 mm with scissors clear
and free of oil. Check that their cut surfaces are free of oil. If it is the second time for those
tubes to be disconnected, they need to be replaced.
(4) Remove the four screws (three "a" screws and one "b" screw) and detach the maintenance
unit from the engine unit.
"a"
"a"
"a"
CR frame
CR guide rail
Holes
(Rear)
Carriage motor
harness
ASF motor
Maintenance unit
"b"
ASF drive ASSY

ASF encoder disc
ASF motor/encoder harness ASSY
(3_098)

"b": Taptite, cup S M3x6
Assembling Notes:
Before setting the switching lever guide back into place, apply the specified lubricant to the
specified point, referring to Section 5 in this chapter.
When mounting the switching lever guide on the maintenance unit, put it over the square
opening in the CR guide rail and then lightly push it down.
When mounting the maintenance unit on the engine unit, fit the two bosses of the shaft holder
(on the left side of the maintenance unit) into the two holes under the CR guide rail.
3-104
Confidential
(5) Remove the screw from the maintenance unit, slightly slide the ASF drive ASSY to the left
and lift it up to detach it from the maintenance unit.
(6) Remove the ASF switching gears A and B.
ASF drive ASSY
ASF switching gear A
ASF switching gear B
Taptite, cup B
M3x10
(Front)
Maintenance unit
(3_099)
3-105
Confidential
Carriage motor
(7) Remove the two screws from the CR frame and detach the carriage motor and its bracket.
Screw, bind M3x6
CR guide rail
(Rear)
CR frame
Motor bracket
Carriage motor
(3_100)
3-106
Confidential
Outer paper guide

(8) Remove the outer paper guide from the switchback roller shaft, starting from either one of
the right and left ends.
CR guide rail
Switchback roller
shaft
Hook
Center hook
CR frame
Hook
Outer paper guide
(Front)
Part code imprinted
(3_101)
Assembling Note: Fit the outer paper guide over the switchback roller shaft, starting from
either one of the right and left hooks, so that the right and left hooks face up and the center one
faces down, that is, the part code imprinted faces up.
3-107
Confidential
Chute cover, registration sensor PCB ASSY, inner chute ASSY and pressure roller release
sensor PCB ASSY
(9) Push down the boss on the lock arm of the chute cover to release it from the hole provided
in the CR guide rail, slide the chute cover to the right (to the left viewed from the rear) to
release the four locks, and then remove the chute cover.
Boss on the lock arm
CR guide rail
(Rear)
Chute cover
Locks
Locks
Paper feed
motor harness (Part of PF/registration sensor
harness ASSY)
3-108
(3_102)
Confidential
(10) Push down the boss on the lock arm of the registration sensor holder (on which the
registration sensor PCB ASSY is mounted) to release it from the hole provided in the CR
guide rail, then remove the holder outwards.
As shown on the next page, pull the support arms on the registration sensor holder
outwards, remove the registration sensor PCB ASSY, and disconnect the registration sensor
harness from the PCB.
Note: The registration sensor harness is a part of the PF/registration sensor harness ASSY.
To completely separate the ASSY from the engine unit, disconnect the PF encoder sensor
harness from the PF encoder sensor PCB, referring to step (14) later.
(11) Using a spring hook from the rear, pull the lock arm of the inner chute ASSY to the rear to
release the boss on the lock arm from the hole provided in the main chassis, slide the inner
chute ASSY to the left (to the right viewed from the rear) to release the seven locks, and
take the inner chute ASSY off the engine unit.
Locks
(Rear)
CR guide rail
Inner chute ASSY

Boss on the
lock arm
Boss on the lock arm

Registration sensor PCB ASSY
PF/registration Registration sensor
sensor harness harness
ASSY
3-109
(3_103)
Confidential
Registration sensor
PCB ASSY
Support
arms

(Part of PF/registration
sensor harness ASSY)
Cable guide
(3_104)
(12) Remove the screw and take the pressure roller release sensor PCB ASSY out of the inner
chute ASSY. Disconnect the harness from the PCB.
Inner chute ASSY
Pressure roller
release sensor harness
Pressure roller
release sensor PCB
ASSY
Taptite, bind B
M2.6x8
(3_105)
3-110
Confidential
PF encoder disc, PF encoder sensor PCB ASSY and PF/registration sensor harness ASSY*
* The PF/registration sensor harness ASSY consists of a PF encoder
sensor harness and registration sensor harness.
(13) If the PF encoder disc needs to be replaced, peel it off from the PF roller gear L.
Note: Once removed, the PF encoder disc will become unusable and a new disc will have
to be put back in.
Note: Remove any adhesive remaining left on the PF roller gear L.
(14) Remove the screw and take the PF encoder sensor PCB ASSY off the engine unit.
If the PF encoder sensor harness has not been disconnected from the PCB in step (10)
above, disconnect it to completely separate the ASSY from the engine unit.
Engine unit
Encoder PCB support
PF encoder sensor
PCB ASSY
Screw, bind
M2x12
Cutout
PF roller gear L
(Left)
PF encoder disc

(Part of PF/registration
sensor harness ASSY)
(3_106)
Assembling Note: When attaching the PF encoder disc to the PF roller gear L, using a spatular
tool makes the job easier. Put on clean gloves to protect the disc surface from dust or
fingerprints.
3-111
Confidential
Paper pull-in roller holder ASSY

(15) Pull the pawl on the paper pull-in roller R outwards and remove the roller R, then pull out
the paper pull-in roller L while rotating it.
(16) Remove the paper pull-in gear.
Paper pull-in roller holder ASSY
Paper pull-in gear
Pawl
Engine unit
(Bottom side)
(3_107)
Assembling Note: Before mounting the paper pull-in roller L, apply the specified lubricant to
the specified points on its shaft, referring to Section 5.
3-112
Confidential
9.18 Ink Cartridge Cover Sensor ASSY, Disc Guide Cover*, Disc Guide* and
Disc Guide Sensor ASSY*
* For disc printing models
(1) Remove the ink cartridge cover sensor ASSY from the front right side of the lower cover as
shown below.
(Front)
Ink cartridge cover sensor ASSY

(3_092)
Lower cover
(2) Remove the two screws* from the disc guide cover*, lift up its rear end to release the two
bosses from the holes provided in the lower cover, and remove the disc guide cover* to the
rear.
Boss
Disc guide cover *

Taptite, bind B
M4x12 *
Boss
Disc guide sensor

harness *
Holes
Lower cover
(3_093)
3-113
Confidential
(3) Remove the disc guide springs (R and L)* and separate the disc guide* from the disc guide
cover*.
Disc guide spring R *
Disc guide cover *
Small loop
Large loop
Boss
Disc guide
spring L *
Disc guide *
Large loop
Small loop
(Front)
(3_094)
Boss
(4) Remove the disc guide sensor ASSY* from the top right of the lower cover as shown
below.
Disc guide sensor ASSY *
Actuator
(Front)
Lower cover
(3_095)
Assembling Notes:
Mount the disc guide sensor ASSY* to the lower cover so that the actuator points to the rear
as shown above.
The disc guide springs R and L* are not the same parts. Be careful with the orientation of
each spring. Fit each spring over the bosses on the disc guide* and its cover*, with the small
loop facing upward and inward.
3-114
Confidential
9.19 Bank ASSY and Base Pads on the Paper Tray ASSY
(1) Pull the four lock arms on the rear of the paper tray ASSY outwards to release the four
latches of the bank ASSY, and separate the bank ASSY from the paper tray.
(2) If the base pad needs to be replaced, peel it off the bottom of the paper tray.
Note: Once removed, the base pad will become unusable and a new pad will have to be put
back in.
Pawls
Paper tray (placed upside down)
Pawls
Latch
Lock arms
Bank ASSY
Latch
Lock arms
Pawls
Depressed
section
Latches
Base pad
Paper tray
Base pad
Bank ASSY
Align the edge of the

base pad with the front edge
of the depressed section on the
paper tray.
Paper tray
Output paper tray cover
(3_109_E)
Assembling Notes:
When attaching a new base pad to the paper tray, align the front edge of the pad with that of
the depressed section on the paper tray and center the pad widthways as shown above.
When mounting the bank ASSY, first insert the four pawls into the openings in the paper tray
and then press the inside of the bank ASSY to the rear so that the four latches snap into place.
3-115
Confidential
(3) If the photo tray base pads need to be replaced, squeeze the photo bypass tray release
button, push the photo bypass tray forward until it clicks into the photo printing position
shown below, and peel the base pads off the bottom of the photo bypass tray.
Note: Once removed, the photo tray base pads will become unusable and new pads will
have to be put back in.
Photo bypass tray
(Photo paper tray)
Photo tray base pads
Photo bypass tray release button
Paper tray
Depressed
section
Photo tray base pads
Output paper tray cover

(3_108_E)
Paper tray
Align the edge of each photo tray

base pad with the front edge of the
depressed section on the paper tray.
Assembling Notes:
When attaching a new photo tray base pad to the photo bypass tray, align the front edge of
the pad with that of the depressed section on the tray and center the pad widthways as shown
above.
3-116
Confidential
CHAPTER 4
ADJUSTMENTS AND UPDATING OF SETTINGS,

REQUIRED AFTER PARTS REPLACEMENT
This chapter details adjustments and updating of settings, which are required if the head/carriage unit,
main PCB and some other parts have been replaced.
IF YOU REPLACE THE HEAD/CARRIAGE UNIT OR ENGINE UNIT

<Operations>
1.1 Update the head property data stored in the EEPROM on the main PCB*
1.2 Clean the new head/carriage unit (Function code 76)
1.3 Print out a nozzle test pattern (Function code 09)
1.4 Adjust the inclination of the head/carriage unit
1.5 Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58)
1.6 Align vertical print lines in monochrome (Function code 65)
1.7 Adjust margins in borderless printing (Function code 66)
1.8 Create head calibration data and write it into flash ROM (Function code 02)
1.9 Check the operation of the pressure roller (Function code 63)
1.10 Print out a total quality check pattern
1.11 Switch back to standby
1.12 Replace the ink cartridges with the protective part
1.13 Obtain machine information at the user site (Instruction to the end user)
*Updating not required when the engine unit only is replaced
<Requirements>
(1) USB cable (one piece)
(2) PC (Windows XP/2000 or later)
(3) Service setting tool (BrUsbSn.exe)
(4) Download utility (FILEDG32.EXE)
(5) Maintenance driver (MaintenanceDriver.zip), if not installed
(6) Data files of print patterns
4-1
Confidential
1.1
Update the head property data stored in the EEPROM on the main PCB*
* Updating not required when the engine unit only is replaced
Tip: Updating can also be done with Function code 68. (Refer to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.23.)
(1) Make sure that the machine's power cord is unplugged from an electrical outlet.
If the machine is connected to a PC, unplug the USB cable.
(2) Switch on the PC.
(3) Plug the machine's power cord into an electrical outlet.
(4) Switch the machine to the maintenance mode. (Refer to Chapter 5.)
(5) Connect the machine to the PC using a USB cable.
(6) On the PC, run the Service setting tool (brusbsn.exe) in the created folder to display the
following window.
(7) On the model menu, click Ink 10Model.
4-2
Confidential
(8) In Port on the BrUsbSn screen, select the port number assigned to the Brother
Maintenance USB Printer.
If the port number is unknown, follow steps 1) through 4) below.
1) Click Start | Settings | Printers.
The Printers window appears as shown below.

2) Right-click the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon.
3) Click Properties.
4-3
Confidential
The Brother Maintenance USB Printer Properties window appears as shown below.
4) Click the Ports tab.
In this example, the port number assigned to the Brother Maintenance USB Printer is
USB001.
(9) In the Head Info. box on the BrUsbSn screen (page 4-2), type the 13-digit property code
(e.g., ALR7795500000) which is printed on the bar code label attached to the lower cover.
Click the OK key.
(10) To check that the entered head property code is correct, use Function code 68 (in Chapter 5,
Section 1.4.23); that is, press the 6 and 8 keys in this order and then press the 2, 5, 8, and 0
keys in this order.
The LCD shows the current head property code (13-digit code) stored in the EEPROM on
the main PCB.
(11) Check that the character string entered in step (9) appears.
If it is OK, press the Stop/Exit key.
If something other than that appears, check the connection between the PC and machine
and go back to step (6).
4-4
Confidential
1.2
Clean the new head/carriage unit (Function code 76)

(1) Open the ink cartridge cover, set comparatively-new ink cartridges (having sufficient ink)
into the ink refill ASSY, and close the ink cartridge cover.
(2) Carry out a purge operation (with function code 76) using the steps below. (See Chapter 5,
Section 1.4.28.)
Press the 7 and 6 keys in this order.
The machine displays "CLEANING ALL" on the LCD and enters the purge mode.
Press the 4 and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order to start an initial purge.
The machine starts an initial purge that refills the ink supply tubes and the print head with
fresh ink.
4-5
Confidential
1.3
Print out a nozzle test pattern (Function code 09)

To check that the head/carriage unit normally sprays ink droplets from all head nozzles, print
out a test pattern with Function code 09 (see Chapter 5, Section 1.4.5) with the following steps.
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set letter- or A4-size paper in the paper tray for
printing test patterns.
(1) Press the 0 and 9 keys in this order.
(2) If dot missing or any other print quality problem is found, use Function code 76 to perform
an appropriate purge operation (refer to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.28).
Nozzle Test Pattern
4-6
Confidential
1.4
Adjust the inclination of the head/carriage unit

Before starting the operation below, be sure to set recording paper in the paper tray for printing
check patterns.
(1) Move the head/carriage unit to the adjustment position in the maintenance mode (Function
code 63), referring to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.20.
(2) Open the document scanner unit.
(3) Turn both the external and internal knobs of the inclination adjuster to the center position
with a spanner and a hexagonal wrench as shown below.
Internal knob
of the inclination adjuster
Center position
External knob
(head_position_2)
(4) Close the document scanner unit.

(5) Drag and drop the "incline_mini11.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver
icon in the Filedrgs window.
The machine displays the "Receiving Data" on the LCD and prints out the head inclination
test pattern "CR-INCLINE EXIT adjust check" (see page 4-9 for a sample printout).
Tip: The head inclination test pattern can also be printed with Function code 61 (refer to
Chapter 5, Section 1.4.19). After printing with a memory card, be sure to remove the card
before proceeding to the following step.
(6) On the test pattern, check the upper single row of blocks and select the block that is the
least uneven print.
4-7
Confidential
(7) Adjust the inclination of the head/carriage unit using the procedure below.
If the least uneven block number in the upper single row is "0":
1) Check the center two rows of blocks and select the block that is the least uneven print.
Turn the external knob of the inclination adjuster with a spanner by the selected block
number of the scale marks.
For example, if the block that is the least uneven print is +1, turn the external knob
clockwise by one scale mark. If it is -1, turn it counterclockwise by one scale mark.
Head/carriage unit
Head cover
External knob
(head_position_1)
2) After adjustment, proceed to step (8).

If the least uneven block number in the upper single row is other than "0":
1) Check the upper single row of blocks and select the block that is the least uneven print.
Turn the internal knob of the inclination adjuster with a hexagonal wrench by the
selected block number of the scale marks.
For example, if the block that is the least uneven print is +1, turn the internal knob
clockwise by one scale mark. If it is -1, turn it counterclockwise by one scale mark.
2) Close the document scanner unit and print the test pattern again in the same way as in
step (5).
3) Move the head/carriage unit to the adjustment position in the maintenance mode
(Function code 63), referring to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.20. Open the document scanner
unit.
4) In the center two rows of blocks, select the block that is the least uneven print. Turn the
external knob with a spanner by the selected block number of the scale marks.
For example, if the block that is the least uneven print is +1, turn the external knob
clockwise by one mark. If it is -1, turn it counterclockwise by one mark.
(8) After adjustment, close the document scanner unit.
The head/carriage unit returns to the home position.
4-8
Confidential
Upper single row of blocks
Center two rows of blocks
Head Inclination Test Pattern
4-9
Confidential
1.5
Update the paper feeding correction value (Function code 58)

1.6
Align vertical print lines in monochrome (Function code 65)

1.7
Adjust margins in borderless printing (Function code 66)

1.8
Create head calibration data and write it into flash ROM

(Function code 02)
1.9
Check the operation of the pressure roller (Function code 63)

4-10
Confidential

Before starting the operation below, be sure to set letter-size paper in the paper tray for printing
check patterns.
Tip: The total quality check pattern can also be printed with Function code 61 (refer to Chapter
5, Section 1.4.19). After printing with a memory card, be sure to remove the card before
proceeding to the following step.
(1) Drag and drop the "qual_mini11.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver
icon in the Filedrgs window.
The machine displays the "Receiving Data" on the LCD and prints out the "Total Quality
Check Pattern" (see page 4-13 for a sample printout).
Disc printing models
In addition to printing the "Total Quality Check Pattern," the disc printing models need to
print a disc printing check pattern.
Drag and drop the "disc.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon in the
Filedrgs window.
The machine displays the "Receiving Data" on the LCD and prints out a disc printing check
pattern (see page 4-14 for a sample printout).
(2) Check the printed check pattern(s). If any problem is found, go to the related section and
make adjustments again as specified in the table below.
A: Platen height adjustment
Check that the height of the platen is properly adjusted.

If any NG block shows the least uneven print, reinstall the
engine unit or replace it.
Note: No platen height adjuster is provided.
B: Adjustment of vertical print lines Check that vertical print lines are aligned.
If any NG block shows the least uneven print, do alignment in
the maintenance mode (Function code 65), referring to
C: Inclination adjustment of the
head/carriage unit
Check that the inclination of the head/carriage unit is properly

adjusted.
If any NG block shows the lightest checkered pattern, go back
to Section 1.4 in this chapter.
D: Paper feed roller adjustment
Check that the paper feeding correction value is adjusted.

If any block except +2 to -2 blocks shows the lightest
checkered pattern, make adjustments in the maintenance
mode (Function code 58), referring to Chapter 5, Section
1.4.17.
E: Margin adjustment for borderless Check that there is no left or right margin in 600 dpi.
printing (600 dpi)
If any margin is found, adjust margins in the maintenance
1.4.22.
F: Margin adjustment for borderless Check that there is no left or right margin in 1200 dpi.
printing (1200 dpi)
If any margin is found, adjust margins in the maintenance
1.4.22.
G: Paper ejection roller adjustment
Check that the paper feeding correction value is adjusted.

If any block except +4 to -4 blocks shows the lightest
checkered pattern, make adjustments in the maintenance
1.4.17.
4-11
Confidential
H: Top margin adjustment

(Disc printing models only)
Check that the top margin is correct.

On the disc printing check pattern, if the top margin is not
within the range from 2.0 to 3.0 mm, adjust the top margin in
I: Right and left margins

adjustment
(Disc printing models only)
Check that the right and left margins are correct.

On the disc printing check pattern, if the right or left margin is
not within the range from 0.0 to 1.0 mm, adjust the margins in
(3) Repeat steps (1) and (2) until no problem is found.
4-12
Confidential
Total Quality Check Pattern

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Platen height adjustment

Adjustment of vertical print lines
Inclination adjustment of the head/carriage unit
Paper feed roller adjustment
Margin adjustment for borderless printing (600 dpi)
Margin adjustment for borderless printing (1200 dpi)
Paper ejection roller adjustment
4-13
Confidential
Disc Printing Check Pattern

:Top margin adjustment (Disc printing models only)
:Right and left margins adjustment (Disc printing models only)
4-14
Confidential

After completion of adjustments, disconnect the USB cable and press the 9 key twice to return
to standby.
Note: Be sure to disconnect the USB cable first. Returning to standby without disconnecting the
USB cable runs "Found New Hardware Wizard" that starts USB driver installation.
1.12 Replace the ink cartridges with the protective part

Remove all four ink cartridges and set the protective part instead. Check that the right-hand
latch fits in the hole provided in the ink refill ASSY.
(3_026)
Protective part
1.13 Obtain machine information at the user site (Instruction to the end user)
When the user receives the repaired machine, he/she needs to obtain the head calibration data
into his/her PC at the user site. The service personnel should contact the user to instruct him/her
to perform the following procedure.
Windows
(1) On the user computer, click Start | Settings | Printers to display the Printers window.
(2) Right-click the Brother Printer driver icon to display the pull-down menu.
(3) Click Properties | Print Settings | Advanced | Other print options | Retrieve Printers
Color Data.
(4) Check that the Use Printer's Color Data check box is selected.
(5) Click Retrieve Printers Color Data.
(6) Wait for the dialog to appear and click OK.
Macintosh
(1) On the user Mac, display the printer list and select the repaired machine.
(2) Select Open Print Queue | Printer Setup | Utility | Open Printer Utility.
(3) From the menu bar, select Control | Retrieve Printer's Color Data .
(4) Wait for the dialog to appear and click OK.
4-15
Confidential
IF YOU REPLACE THE MAIN PCB

Note: If you replace the main PCB, it is necessary to make a backup of the machine information, user
setting information, and head calibration data into an external memory before starting disassembly of
the machine. After the completion of reassembling jobs, restore the backup data to the new main
PCB. For detailed procedure of the backup and restoration, refer to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.12
"Backup of Machine Information (Function code 46) (User-accessible)" and Chapter 5, Section
1.4.23 "Updating of Head Property Data and Backup/Restoration of Head Calibration Data (Function
code 68)."
Note: For this series of machines, load programs onto the main PCB twice for basic programs and
local programs. That is, after replacement of the main PCB, load basic programs, customize the
EEPROM for the destination with Function code 74, and then load local programs.
If the machine information is successfully restored in Section 2.5 in this chapter, it is not necessary to
perform operations given in Sections 2.8 to 2.12 and 2.17.
<Operations>
2.1 Load update programs/data
2.2 Customize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 74)
2.3 Initialize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 01)
2.4 Load local programs
2.5 Restore machine information (Function code 46)
2.6 Restore head calibration data (Function code 68)
2.7 Check the sensor operation (Function code 32)
2.8 Specify the CIS type (Function code 59)
2.9 Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55)
2.10 Set an ID code (change the serial number) and update the head property data
2.12 Align vertical print lines (Function code 65)
2.14 Create head calibration data and write it into flash ROM (Function code 02)
2.15 Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart in ADF scanning
2.17 Adjust the touch panel (Function code 78) (For models with touch panel)
<Requirements>
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
USB cable (one piece)

PC (Windows XP/2000 or later)
Service setting tool (BrUsbSn.exe)
Download utility (FILEDG32.EXE)
Maintenance driver (MaintenanceDriver.zip), if not installed
Data files of print patterns
4-16
Confidential
2.1
Load update programs/data

This procedure writes firmware to the main PCB or updates it.
2.1.1 If the main PCB is replaced with a new one

Load firmware using an SD memory card
(1) Turn the machine on to display " CheckerVer*.*x" (where *.*x denotes the version) on
the LCD.
(2) Insert an SD memory card into a PC holding a target firmware file (e.g., lz00001_a.pmu)
and copy the file into the SD memory card.
Note: Copy only a single firmware file into an SD memory card. Copying two or more files
may result in loading of an improper file.
Note: Always copy a firmware file designed for the corresponding model to an SD
memory card. No model identification is possible in loading firmware using an SD
memory card; therefore, the machine loads a copied file even if it is designed for any other
model.
Note: Be sure to use an SD card. Using any other memory card does not start loading.
(3) Insert the SD memory card into the memory card slot in the machine.
The LCD momentarily shows "Receiving: SDcard" and changes to "Updating: SDcard"
and firmware loading starts.
Upon completion of loading, the machine automatically reboots and switches to standby.
Load firmware using a PC
[ A ] .pjl firmware file

(1) Turn the machine on to display " CheckerVer*.*x" (where *.*x denotes the version) on
the LCD. With the version being displayed, connect the machine to your PC using a USB
cable.
The PC shows "Brother Maintenance USB Printer (Copy 1)" newly copied. (This does not
occur if it was copied.)
(2) On the PC, run "filedg32.exe."
The Filedrgs window appears.
(3) Drag and drop the target firmware (e.g., lz00001_a.pjl) onto the Brother Maintenance USB
Printer driver icon in the Filedrgs window.
Note: To use a firmware file, extract it beforehand by double-clicking. It is a self-extracting
file having the extension .exe.
After approx. 2 to 3 minutes, the loading operation is complete and the machine
automatically reboots and returns to standby.
(4) On the machine, display the version of the installed firmware on the LCD by pressing the *
and # keys simultaneously (for models with numerical keypad) or by pressing the
and
Stop/Exit keys simultaneously (for models without numerical keypad).
Sample version number shown on the LCD: 0A810060953:4B69
(The top line shows the version number.) P0601242005:4123
B0601242005:1C8D
If the displayed version number is identical with the firmware version you installed, the
loading operation has been successfully finished.
4-17
Confidential
Note: If loading operation ends abnormally, turn the machine off and on. Wait for the machine
to emit a long beep and automatically enter the firmware loading mode, and then perform the
loading procedure above again.
[ B ] .pmu firmware file
Unplug the power cord of the machine from the electrical outlet and disconnect the USB cable
that connects the machine with your PC.
(1) On the machine, follow the steps below to enter the firmware loading mode.
Models with numerical keypad
1) Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet with the 0 key held down and keep holding
it down until the following appears on the LCD.
2) Hold down the 1 key until the following appears on the LCD.
Models without numerical keypad

1) Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet with the
and Color Start keys held
down and keep holding it down until the following appears on the LCD.
2) Hold down the Black Start (Mono Start) key until the following appears on the LCD.
3) Hold down the Color Start key until the following appears on the LCD.
4) Hold down the Black Start (Mono Start) key until the following appears on the LCD.
When the black and white pattern shown above is displayed, the machine is ready to
receive programs or data for firmware installation from the connected PC.
Note: Pressing a wrong key or no key within the specified time in steps 1) through 4) above
causes an error. If it happens, unplug the power cord and go back to step 1).
4-18
Confidential
(2) Connect the machine to your PC using a USB cable.

(4) Drag and drop the firmware (e.g., lz0023_a.pmu) onto the Brother Maintenance USB
and # keys simultaneously.
B0601242005:1C8D
4-19
Confidential
2.1.2 If the main PCB loaded with programs is used (Updating existing programs)
A main PCB used for any other machine has been loaded with programs. If the current main
PCB is replaced with such a used PCB, update existing programs using the procedure given
below.
Load firmware using an external memory
Load firmware in the maintenance mode (Function code 28), referring to Chapter 5, Section
1.4.10.
Loading firmware with this procedure inherits fax data stored in the main PCB.
Load firmware using a PC
[ A ] .pjl firmware file

Loading firmware with this procedure inherits fax data stored in the main PCB.
(1) Turn the machine on and switch it to the maintenance mode (refer to Chapter 5).
(3) Drag and drop the target firmware (e.g., lz00001_a.pjl) onto the Brother Maintenance USB
and
B0601242005:1C8D
[ B ] .pmu firmware file
Loading firmware with the following procedure deletes fax data stored in the main PCB.
Unplug the power cord of the machine from the electrical outlet and make sure that the machine
is connected to your PC with a USB cable.
(1) Models with numerical keypad While holding down the 5 key, plug the power cord into
an electrical outlet.
Models without numerical keypad While holding down the
simultaneously, plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
and Stop/Exit keys
When the black and white pattern shown above is displayed, the machine is ready to
receive programs or data for firmware installation from the connected PC.
4-20
Confidential

(3) Drag and drop the target firmware (e.g., lz0023_a.pmu) onto the Brother Maintenance USB
Note: To use a firmware file, extract it beforehand by double-clicking. It is a selfextracting file having the extension .exe.
and
B0601242005:1C8D
4-21
Confidential
2.2
Customize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 74)

Note: Once this procedure is carried out, it is necessary to write the corresponding language
data, so be sure to write local programs, referring to Section 2.4 below.
2.3
Initialize the EEPROM on the main PCB (Function code 01)

2.4
Load local programs

Note: This procedure is not required when no EEPROM customizing has been performed with
Function code 74 in Section 2.2 in this chapter.
Reload local program, referring to Section 2.1.2 "If the main PCB loaded with programs is used
(Updating existing programs)."
2.5
Restore machine information (Function code 46)

Restore the machine information and user setting information that have been backed up in an
external memory, referring to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.12.
If the machine information is successfully restored, it is not necessary to perform operations given in
Sections 2.9 to 2.13 and 2.17.
If the machine has failed to back up the machine information into an external memory at the
start of repair, replace the ink absorber box and flushing box, and then reset each of the purge
and flushing counts with the following procedure.
(3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times until the purge (or flushing) count
appears on the LCD.
(4) Press the 2, 7, 8 and 3 keys in this order to reset the purge (or flushing) count.
(5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
2.6
Restore head calibration data (Function code 68)

Restore head calibration data that has been backed up, referring to Chapter 5, Section 1.4.23.
If restoring head calibration data ends successfully, it is not necessary to perform operations
given in Section 2.14.
2.7
Check the sensor operation (Function code 32)

2.8
Specify the CIS type (Function code 59)

4-22
Confidential
If restoring machine information ends successfully in Section 2.5, it is not necessary to perform
operations given in Sections 2.9 to 2.13 and 2.17.
2.9
Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55)
2.10 Set an ID code (change the serial number) and update the head property
data
Note: Make sure that the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver has been installed to your
PC. To do it, click Start | Settings | Printers to call up the Printers window and confirm that the
Brother Maintenance USB Printer icon (shown on the sample window on page 4-3) is
displayed. If the driver has not been installed, install it.
(1) Make sure that your PC is turned off, then connect the machine to your PC using a USB
cable.
(2) Switch the PC on.
(3) On the PC, run the Service setting tool (BrUsbSn.exe) to display the following window.
(4) On the model menu, click Ink 10Model.

(5) In Port on the BrUsbSn screen, select the port number assigned to the Brother
Maintenance USB Printer. If the port number is unknown, follow the instructions given in
Section 1.1, step (8).
4-23
Confidential
(6) In the Serial No box on the BrUsbSn screen, type the 15-digit serial number (e.g.,
U62663C0F000136) printed on the nameplate labeled to the machine as an ID code.
(serial_number_label_mini11)
Serial number label
Tip: The serial number can also be changed with Function code 80. (Refer to Chapter 5,
Section 1.4.31.)
(7) In the Head Info. box, type the 13-digit property code (e.g., ALR7795500000) which is
printed on the bar code label attached to the lower cover. Click the OK key.
Head property label

(Bar code label)
(head_property_mini11)
Tip: The head property code can also be entered with Function code 68. (Refer to Chapter
5, Section 1.4.23.)
(8) Check whether the entered character strings (ID code and head property code) are correct
with the following procedure.
In the initial stage of the maintenance mode, press the 8 and 0 keys in this order to call up
the log information on the LCD.
Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times to display "S/N" on the LCD, then
press OK key. Check that the displayed code is that string entered in step (6).
Next, press the Black Start (Mono Start) key once to display the head property code.
Check that the displayed code is the string entered in step (7).
(9) If both are OK, proceed to Section 2.11.
If something wrong is displayed, check the connection between the PC and machine and go
back to step (2).
4-24
Confidential
2.12 Align vertical print lines (Function code 65)


2.14 Create head calibration data and write it into flash ROM (Function code
02)
If restoring head calibration data ends successfully in Section 2.6 above, this procedure is not
required.
2.15 Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart in ADF
scanning
Refer to Section 3.1.

2.17 Adjust the touch panel (Function code 78) (For models with touch panel)

4-25
Confidential
IF YOU REPLACE THE ADF OR ADF-RELATED PARTS
3.1
Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart in ADF
scanning
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set letter-size paper in the paper tray for
printing and making a copy of the check pattern. To get the accurate print data, we suggest
using the Brother genuine plain paper PB60 or other higher quality one (DO NOT USE
glossy paper).
(2) Connect the machine to your PC with a USB cable.
(3) On the PC, run "filedg32.exe" in the folder created.
The Filedrgs window appears as shown below.
(4) Drag and drop the "chart.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon in the
Filedrgs window shown above.
The machine displays the "Receiving Data" on the LCD and prints out the "ADF COPY
CHART" (see page 4-28 for a sample printout).
Note: If the print quality on the ADF COPY CHART is poor, perform head cleaning and
then print it again.
Tip: The print pattern can also be printed with Function code 61 (refer to Chapter 5,
Section 1.4.19). After printing with a memory card, be sure to remove the card before
(5) Press the 9 key twice to return to standby.
Wait for the printed chart to dry well.
(6) Fully insert the top edge of the printed "ADF COPY CHART" facing down into the ADF,
then fit the document guides to the document size.
Press the Copy key, set the copy quality mode to "Best" and press the Color Start key to
make a copy.
Note: Check that the document does not skew.
Note: During copying, do not touch the document to prevent printed images from
displacement.
4-26
Confidential
(7) Check the copied chart, referring to the "Check Items on the ADF COPY CHART" given
below.
If any problem is found, remove the newly mounted ADF unit or ADF-related parts once
and set it (them) into place, or check and correct the connection of ADF-related harnesses.
Check Items on the ADF COPY CHART

Check that the copied chart has none of the following defects.
A: Contrast chart 1
Black or white vertical streaks
Patchy color
Missing dots
B: Color blocks
Patchy color
In the second row, black block printed in yellow or red
Area expansion of block(s)
In the third row, blocks printed too dim to see
Frames of white blocks missing or discolored
Note: Vertical streaks in color blocks are negligible.
C: Contrast chart 2
Vertical streaks in 0.3 to 0.5 charts
(Vertical streaks only in 0.2 chart are negligible.)
Patchy color in 0.3 to 0.5 charts
(Patchy color only in 0.2 chart is negligible.)
Missing dots in 0.2 to 0.5 charts
D: Resolution chart
Overlapping lines (diagonal or horizontal) in 4 to 6 mm charts

Curved lines in 4 to 6 mm charts
Black or color vertical streaks in 4 to 6 mm charts
Discoloration in 4 to 6 mm charts
E: Whole page
Ghost (image printed on the blank area)
Color horizontal streaks
Black vertical band
4-27
Confidential
ADF Copy Chart
4-28
Confidential
IF YOU REPLACE THE INK ABSORBER BOX OR FLUSHING BOX
4.1
Reset each of the purge and flushing counts

(3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times until the purge (or flushing) count
appears on the LCD.
(4) Press the 2, 7, 8, and 3 keys in this order to reset the purge (or flushing) count.
(5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
(6) Press the 9 key twice to exit from the maintenance mode.
Tip: This machine counts all purge and flushing operations performed since produced in order
to prevent the ink absorber box and flushing box from overflowing with drained and flushed
ink, respectively. An initial purge, for example, advances the count by 537.
When the purge or flushing count approaches 10750 or 660336587, respectively, the
"MACHINE ERROR 46" appears and further purge or flushing operations are prohibited.
Replace the ink absorber box and flushing box, and then reset their counts using the procedure
above.
4-29
Confidential
IF YOU REPLACE THE CONTROL PANEL ASSY, PANEL PCB OR

LCD UNIT
5.1
Adjust the touch panel (Function code 78) (For models with touch panel)
Note: This operation is not required when only the panel PCB is replaced.
5.2
Check LCD operation (Function code 12)

Note: This operation is not required when only the panel PCB is replaced.
5.3
Check the operation of the panel PCB (Function code 13)

Note: This operation is not required when only the LCD unit is replaced.
4-30
Confidential
IF YOU REPLACE THE FB UNIT* OR DOCUMENT SCANNER UNIT

* FB unit: ADF & document cover ASSY and document scanner unit
6.1
Acquire white level data and set CIS scanner area (Function code 55)
6.2
Print out an ADF copy chart and make a copy of that chart in ADF
scanning
Refer to Section 3.1 in this chapter.
4-31
Confidential
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes the maintenance mode and other service functions, which are exclusively
designed for the purpose of checks, settings and adjustments of the machine and can be triggered by the
keys on the control panel*.
* For key operations, refer to Section 1.2 in this chapter.
MAINTENANCE MODE
In the maintenance mode, you can update memory (EEPROM: electrically erasable programmable
read-only memory) contents for optimizing the drive conditions of the head/carriage unit and paper
feed roller/paper ejection roller in the engine unit, if those units have been replaced, or for setting the
CIS scanner area, for example. You can also customize the EEPROM according to the shipment
destination of the machine concerned. In addition, you can perform operational checks of the LCD,
panel PCB or sensors, perform a print test, display the log information or error codes, and configure
firmware switches (WSW).
1.1
Entry to the Maintenance Mode
1.1.1 How to Enter the End User-accessible Maintenance Mode

Basically, the maintenance-mode functions listed in Section 1.3 in this chapter should be
accessed by service personnel only. However, you can allow end users to access some of these
under the guidance of service personnel (e.g., by telephone).
The user-accessible functions are shaded in the table given in Section 1.3. Function code 10
accesses the firmware switches, each of which has eight selectors. You should not allow end
users to access all of those selectors, but you can allow them to access user-accessible selectors
which are shaded in the firmware switch tables in the "Firmware Switches (WSW)" document
separately issued.
The service personnel should instruct end users to follow the procedure given below.
(1) Models with
key
Press the
and Black Start (Mono Start) keys simultaneously. Then press the Black
Start (Mono Start) and
keys in this order.
Models without
key
Press the Menu, Black Start (Mono Start) and Menu keys in this order.
Tip: Either of the following operations also makes the machine enter the maintenance
mode.
- Press the Menu, Black Start (Mono Start), and 0 keys in this order, in the same way as
conventional models.
- While holding down the Color Start key, plug the power cord into an electrical outlet.
(2) Wait for the machine to display "
" on the LCD, indicating that the
machine is ready to accept entry from the keys. Enter the desired function code.
(3) To quit the maintenance mode operation in midway and switch to standby, press the Stop/
Exit key. When each of the user-accessible functions is completed, the machine
automatically returns to standby.
Note: The operating procedure of the user-accessible maintenance mode may differ slightly
depending upon machine models.
5-1
Confidential
1.1.2 How to Enter the Maintenance Mode Exclusive to Service Personnel

(1) Models with
key
Press the
and Black Start (Mono Start) keys simultaneously. Press the Black Start
(Mono Start) key, then press the Color Start key four times.
Models without
key
Press the Menu and Black Start (Mono Start) keys in this order, then press the
four times.
key
Tip: Either of the following operations also makes the machine enter the maintenance
mode.
- Press the Menu, *, 2, 8, 6 and 4 keys in this order, in the same way as conventional
models.
- While holding down the Black Start (Mono Start) key, plug the power cord into an
electrical outlet.
(2) Wait for the machine to beep for approx. one second (only MFC) and display
"
" on the LCD, indicating that the machine is ready to accept
entry from the keys. Enter the desired function code.
(3) To quit the maintenance mode operation in midway and switch to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode, press the Stop/Exit key. When each of the user-accessible functions is
completed, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
1.2
Key Operation in Maintenance Mode

Keys to be used in the maintenance mode differ depending upon the models control panel
specification.
1.2.1 Entering a Desired Function Code at the Initial Stage of the Maintenance Mode
Use the numerical keypad to enter the corresponding 2-digit function code.
(Example) To select Function code 80, press the 8 and 0 keys in this order.
Models without numerical keypad
Use the numerical keypad (software keypad) on the touch panel to enter the corresponding 2digit function code.
(Example) To select Function code 80, press the 8 and 0 keys on the touch panel in this order.
The details of each maintenance-mode function are described in Section 1.4 in this chapter.
Notes
To exit from the maintenance mode and switch to standby, press the 9 key twice in
the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
Pressing the Stop/Exit key after entering only one digit restores the machine to
If an invalid function code is entered, the machine resumes the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
5-2
Confidential
1.2.2 Keys to be Used in the Maintenance Mode

This chapter provides the operating procedure for base models, that is, models with numerical
keypad and without touch panel. For other models, see the table below.
Base models
Models with numerical keypad/
without touch panel
OK
Clear
Models with both numerical

keypad and touch panel
Models without numerical

keypad
#, *, and 0 to 9 (on touch
#, *, and 0 to 9
panel)
(on touch panel)
(on touch panel)
Black Start (Mono Start)
Stop/Exit
Set (on touch panel)
CLR (on touch panel)
(on touch panel)
(on touch panel)
TIP: Using the >> and << keys on the touch panel switches the software keypads between the
numerical and function keypads.
5-3
Confidential
1.3
List of Maintenance-mode Functions

Maintenance-mode Functions
Function
Code
01
02
05
08
09
10
11
12
13
17
28
32
46
52
53
54
55
58
59
61
63
65
66
68
69
70
74
75
76
77
78
80
82
88
91
99
(Menu + #,
2, 7, 9, 0, 0)
Function
Reference
Section (Page)
EEPROM Parameter Initialization

Creating of Head Calibration Data and Writing it into Flash ROM
1.4.1 (5-5)
1.4.2 (5-6)
Printout of Scanning Compensation Data

ADF Performance Test
Printout of Nozzle Test Pattern
1.4.3 (5-9)
1.4.4 (5-11)
1.4.5 (5-12)
Firmware Switch Setting

Printout of Firmware Switch Data
Operational Check of LCD
1.4.6 (5-14)
1.4.6 (5-15)
1.4.7 (5-17)
Operational Check of Panel PCB (Check of Keys)

EEPROM Dump and Log Information Transfer
Updating of Firmware Using an External Memory
1.4.8 (5-18)
1.4.9 (5-20)
1.4.10 (5-21)
Sensor Operational Check

Backup of Machine Information
Setting of Country/Language
1.4.11 (5-22)
1.4.12 (5-24)
1.4.13 (5-26)
Transfer of Received FAX Data and/or Equipment's Log

Fine Adjustment of Scanning Position
Acquisition of White Level Data and CIS Scanner Area Setting
1.4.14 (5-27)
1.4.15 (5-30)
1.4.16 (5-31)
Updating of Paper Feeding Correction Value

Checking of CIS Travel and Specifying of CIS Type
Printout of PRN/JPEG Files in Memory Card
Travel Check of the Head/Carriage Unit and Operational Check of
Pressure Roller
Alignment of Vertical Print Lines in Monochrome
1.4.17 (5-32)
1.4.18 (5-39)
1.4.19 (5-40)
Margin Adjustment in Borderless Printing

Updating of Head Property Data and Backup/Restoration of Head
Calibration Data
Traveling Speed Check of Head/Carriage Unit
Cleaning of Leveler Roller (LR) ASSY
1.4.22 (5-44)
EEPROM Customizing
Travel of Head/Carriage Unit (for removing paper particles and
dust accumulated on the maintenance unit)
Purge Operation
Print of the Equipments Log
Adjustment of Touch Panel
1.4.26 (5-52)
Display of the Equipment's Log

Equipment Error Code Indication
Assurance Mode Switch Setting
EEPROM Parameter Initialization (except the telephone number
storage area)
Exit from the Maintenance Mode
Cancellation of the Pin TX Lock Mode (Not applicable to
Japanese and U.S.A. models)
1.4.31 (5-65)
1.4.32 (5-70)
1.4.33 (5-70)
1.4.20 (5-41)
1.4.21 (5-42)
1.4.23 (5-48)
1.4.24 (5-50)
1.4.25 (5-51)
1.4.27 (5-56)
1.4.28 (5-57)
1.4.29 (5-60)
1.4.30 (5-63)
1.4.1 (5-5)
------ (5-2)
2.1 (5-78)
: A function that the end user can use. (Refer to Section 1.1.1.)
5-4
Confidential
1.4
Detailed Description of Maintenance-mode Functions
1.4.1 EEPROM Parameter Initialization (Function code 01, 91)

Function
The machine initializes the parameters, user switches, firmware switches and assurance mode
switch settings registered in the EEPROM, to the initial values. Entering function code 01
initializes almost all of the EEPROM areas, but entering 91 does not initialize some areas, as
listed below.
Function code
01
Data item
Maintenance-mode functions
User switches
Firmware switches
Remote activation code
Assurance mode switch settings
Activity report
Station ID data
Outside line number
Telephone function registration
Speed dialing
Group dialing
Call transfer data
EEPROM customizing code
(4-digit)
91
These will be
initialized.
All of these will be
initialized.
These will not be
initialized.
This will not be initialized.

(Note that the first digit of the 4-digit code will be
initialized to "0." If the code is 1001, for example,
it will be initialized to 0001.)
Operating Procedure
(1) Press the 0 and 1 keys (or the 9 and 1 keys according to your need) in this order in the
initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "SELECT 01?" ("SELECT 91?") appears on the LCD.
The "PARAMETER INIT" appears on the LCD.
(3) Upon completion of parameter initialization, the machine returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
5-5
Confidential
1.4.2 Creating of Head Calibration Data and Writing it into Flash ROM
(Function code 02)
Function
This procedure scans the "Print pattern for creating head calibration data" sheet (see page 5-8)
placed on the scanner glass of the document cover, creates the head calibration data using the
scanning result, and writes it into the flash ROM on the main PCB.
Operating Procedure
Notes Before proceeding to the procedure given below, use Function code 55, referring to
Section 1.4.16 in this chapter. If not, this function may fail to create head calibration
data correctly.
Make sure that both the document scanner unit and document cover are closed.
For higher precision of uneven printing correction, use the recording paper specified
below to print the "pattern for creating head calibration data."
US: Xerox 4200DP 20 lb., Brother BP60PL
EU, AP and others: Xerox Business 80 g/m2, Brother BP60PA
(1) Drag and drop the "head_calib.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon
in the Filedrgs window.
The machine displays the "Receiving Data" on the LCD and prints out "Print pattern for
creating head calibration data" (see page 5-8 for a sample printout).
Tip: The print pattern can also be printed with Function code 61 (refer to Section 1.4.19 in
this chapter). After printing with a memory card, be sure to remove the card before
Note: Make sure that the USB cable is disconnected.
(2) Set the print pattern on the scanner glass of the document cover.
(3) Press the 0 and 2 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "MAINTENANCE 02" and "Set Sheet on FB?" appear on the LCD in this order.
Note: Pressing the Stop/Exit key immediately returns the machine to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode without creating head calibration data.
The machine displays the "Scanning" on the LCD and starts scanning the "Print pattern for
creating head calibration data" placed on the scanner glass.
Upon completion of scanning, the machine displays the "Write Head Calib" on the LCD,
creates the head calibration data, and writes it into the flash ROM on the main PCB.
Upon completion of writing, the "Complete" appears. Press the Stop/Exit key to return to
Note: If an error occurs, the machine beeps and displays "Error No **" on the LCD. Press
the Stop/Exit key to return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode and then recover
the machine from the error state, following the table given on the next page. Then go back
to step (2).
5-6
Confidential
Error code
The following error has occurred.
Do the following:
01
Failed to detect the external

frame.
02
Internal image inclined.
03
Failed to detect position.
04
Failed to write head calibration

data.
05
The uneven printing correction

Set selector 1 on AMS05 to "0" with
function for upper and lower ends
Function code 88, referring to
of the nozzle is disabled with
Section 1.4.33 in this chapter.
Function code 88.
06
Cannot get memory space.
Delete stored data including fax

data.
Stop any other function if being
used.
Replace the main PCB.
07
The document scanner unit is

open.
Close the document scanner unit.

Reconnect the panel harness.
Reposition the document scanner
open actuator.
Replace the rubber keypad(s).
Replace the panel PCB.
09
Other scanning errors
Use Function code 55, referring to

Section 1.4.16 in this chapter.
10
A media is inserted and also the

USB cable or LAN cable is
connected.
Disconnect the USB cable.
5-7
Clean the scanner glass.

Reposition a document along the
document guides on the document
cover.
Go back to step (1) and print out
"Print pattern for creating head
calibration data" again.
Clean the scanner glass.
Reposition a document along the
document guides on the document
cover.
Restart the machine and perform the
function again.
Confidential
Print Pattern for Creating Head Calibration Data
5-8
Confidential
1.4.3 Printout of Scanning Compensation Data (Function code 05)

Function
The machine prints out the white and black level data for scanning compensation.
Operating Procedure
Do not start this function merely after powering on the machine but start it after carrying out a
sequence of scanning operation. Unless the machine has carried out any scanning operation,
this function cannot print out correct scanning compensation data. This is because at the start of
scanning operation, the machine initializes white and black level data and takes in the scanning
compensation reference data.
NOTE: If this function is used after monochrome scanning, only the green data is valid.
NOTE: Be sure to disconnect the USB cable from the machine before proceeding to the
procedure below.
The "DUMP 0:GRA 1:ALL" appears on the LCD.
(2) Press the 0 key to print out a) through k) of the scanning compensation data list detailed
below and shown on the next page; press the 1 key to print out all of a) through o).
During printing, the "PRINTING" is displayed on the LCD.
The scanning compensation data list contains the following:
a) Black/white data graph
b) LED light intensity PWM data for color image (1 byte)
c) LED light intensity PWM data for monochrome image (1 byte)
d) LED light intensity pulse data for green image (2 bytes)
e) LED light intensity pulse data for blue image (2 bytes)
f) LED light intensity pulse data for red image (2 bytes)
g) LED light intensity pulse data for monochrome image (2 bytes)
h) AFE RLCV*1 data (1 byte)
i) AFE offset data (1 byte)
j) AFE gain data (1 byte)
k) Background color compensation data*2 (1 byte)
l) Black level data*3
m)White level data for red image*3
n) White level data for green image*3
o) White level data for blue image*3
*1 AFE: Analog Front End
RLCV: Reset Level Clamp Voltage

*2 Data for background color compensation (filtering out background color) to be performed in
monochrome copying of a document printed on colored paper.

*3 Data differs depending upon the CIS type
(3) Upon completion of printing of the compensation data list, the machine returns to the initial
stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTE: If any data is abnormal, its code will be printed in inline style.
5-9
Confidential
Scanning Compensation Data List
5-10
Confidential
1.4.4 ADF Performance Test (Function code 08)

Function
The machine counts the documents fed by the automatic document feeder (ADF) and displays
the count on the LCD for checking the ADF performance.
Operating Procedure
(1) Set documents. (Allowable up to the ADF capacity.)

The "DOC. READY 0" appears on the LCD.
The machine feeds the documents in and out while counting them and displaying the
current count on the LCD as shown below.
ADF CHK P.01
Current count (1st page in this example)
(3) After counting all documents, the machine shows the final count. To return the machine to
the initial stage of the maintenance mode, press the Stop/Exit key.
5-11
Confidential
1.4.5 Printout of Nozzle Test Pattern (Function code 09)

Function
This function prints out a nozzle test pattern (Print Quality Check sheet) to allow the service
personnel to check the print quality.
If any print quality problem is found, perform an appropriate purge operation, referring to
Section 1.4.28 "Purge Operation (Function code 76) (User-accessible)" in this chapter.
Operating Procedure
Before starting the operation below, be sure to set letter- or A4-size paper in the paper tray for
printing test patterns.
Press the 0 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The figure on the next page shows a test pattern which is printed on the Print Quality Check
sheet.
5-12
Confidential
Nozzle Test Pattern
5-13
Confidential
1.4.6 Firmware Switch Setting and Printout (Function codes 10 and 11)
(User-accessible)
[ A ] Firmware switch setting
Function
The machine incorporates the firmware switch functions which can be activated with the
procedures using the control panel keys.
For details about the firmware switches, refer to the "Firmware Switches (WSW)" document
separately issued.
The firmware switches have been configured at the factory in conformity to the
communications standards and codes of each country. Do not disturb them unless necessary.
Some firmware switches may not be applicable in some versions. The firmware switch data list
indicates "Not used." for those inapplicable switches.
Operating Procedure
The machine displays the "WSW00" on the LCD and becomes ready to accept a firmware
switch number.
(2) Enter the desired number from the firmware switch numbers (01 through 60).
The following appears on the LCD:
Selector 1
Selector 8
WSWXX = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(3) Use the
and
keys to move the cursor to the selector position to be modified.
(4) Enter the desired number using the 0 and 1 keys.

(5) Press the OK key. This operation saves the newly entered selector values onto the
EEPROM and readies the machine for accepting a firmware switch number.
NOTE: Pressing the Stop/Exit key instead of the OK key returns the machine to the initial
stage of the maintenance mode without saving new setting.
(6) Repeat steps (2) through (5) until the modification for the desired firmware switches is
completed.
(7) Press the Stop/Exit key to return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
NOTE: If there is a pause of more than one minute after a single-digit number is entered for
double-digit firmware switch numbers, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of
the maintenance mode.
5-14
Confidential
[ B ] Printout of firmware switch data

Function
The machine prints out the setting items of the firmware switches and their contents specified.
Operating Procedure
(1) Press the 1 key twice in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine shows "PRINTING" on the LCD and prints out the configuration list as
shown on the next page.
Upon completion of printing, the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.
5-15
Confidential
Configuration List
5-16
Confidential
1.4.7 Operational Check of LCD (Function code 12) (User-accessible)

Function
This function allows you to check whether the LCD works normally.
Operating Procedure
Checking the display state of the LCD

(2) Press the
key.
Each time you press the
key, the LCD cycles through the displays as shown below.
(3) Press the Stop/Exit key in any process of the above display cycle. The machine returns to
5-17
Confidential
1.4.8 Operational Check of Panel PCB (Function code 13)

Function
This function allows you to check the panel PCB for normal operation.
Operating Procedure
The "00
" will appear on the LCD.
(2) Press the keys in the order designated in the illustration shown below.
The LCD shows the corresponding number in decimal notation each time a key is pressed.
Check that the displayed number is correct by referring to the illustration below.
If a key is pressed out of order, the machine beeps and displays the "INVALID OPERATE"
on the LCD. To return to the status ready to accept key entry for operational check, press
the Stop/Exit key.
(3) After the last number key is pressed, the machine beeps and returns to the initial stage of
the maintenance mode.
To terminate this operation, press the Stop/Exit key. The machine returns to the initial
MFCJ280W
5-18
Confidential
MFCJ430W/J432W
MFCJ625DW/J825DW
Key Entry Order
5-19
Confidential
1.4.9 EEPROM Dump and Log Information Transfer (Function code 17)
(User-accessible)
Function
The EEPROM dump function transfers the EEPROM settings made in the machine to another
fax machine as fax data.
The log information transfer function outputs users log information (e.g., panel operation) and
machines operation log information to a USB flash memory or a PC to save it as a CSV file.
Operating Procedure
EEPROM dumping
(1) Let the end user make a call to the destination machine to which he/she should transfer the
EEPROM settings as fax data.
(2) If the line is connected, instruct the end user to:
1) Switch his/her machine to the end user-accessible maintenance mode.
2) Press the 1 and 7 keys in this order.
3) Press the 1 key.
The machine starts transferring the EEPROM settings to the destination machine as fax
data.
Log information transfer
Instruct the end user to:
(1) Switch his/her machine to the end user-accessible maintenance mode.
(3) To output the log information into a USB flash memory, insert a USB flash memory to his/
her machine and press the 1 key.
The machine saves the log information in the USB flash memory as a CSV file.
To output the log information to a PC, connect the machine to the PC with a USB cable and
then press the 2 key.
The machine saves the log information in the PC as a CSV file.
5-20
Confidential
1.4.10 Updating of Firmware Using an External Memory (Function code 28)

Function
This function updates firmware stored in the flash ROM on the main PCB using an external
memory (memory card or USB flash memory). It enables updating of firmware without
connecting the machine to a PC.
TIP: For instructions on how to update firmware when the main PCB has been replaced or for
operations using a PC, refer to Chapter 4, Section 2.1.
Operating Procedure
(1) Switch your PC ON and insert an external memory.

(2) Create a folder named "BROTHER" in the top layer of the external memory's directory and
copy the firmware file having the extension .pjl into that folder.
Note: Before copying, check that the file name of the firmware matches with your
machine. Be sure to save only one firmware file having the extension .pjl in the
"BROTHER" folder. Otherwise, the firmware cannot be updated correctly.
Tip: If a firmware file not matching the machine is used, the firmware cannot be updated,
but note that you can superficially continue the operation until step (5) below without any
error.
Tip: For instructions on how to obtain the firmware file, refer to Chapter 4, Section 2.1.
(3) Remove the external memory from the PC and insert it into the machine in the initial stage
of the maintenance mode.
Note: Do not insert more than one external memory at a time.
Note: When performing this procedure for any other machine with the same external
memory, delete the data previously stored in the external memory.
(4) On the machine, press the 2 and 8 keys in this order.
The file name ********.pjl appears on the LCD. Check that ******** is identical with the
file name that has been copied into the external memory.
(5) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key to start updating.
The "Receiving Data" appears on the LCD, and after a while, it changes to "Program
Updating."
Note: Pressing the Color Start key in this step does not start updating.
Note: Never remove the external memory from the machine when updating is in progress.
(6) Updating will complete in a few minutes, and the machine automatically restarts and
returns to the standby state.
Remove the external memory from the machine and store it in a safe place.
Note 1: If any of the error messages listed below appears, press the Stop/Exit key, and the
machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
Error Message
Cause
Card is used
Insert Card
No file
Too many files
The external memory is being used by another operation.

No external memory is inserted.
Invalid file name
There is more than one file having the extension .pjl in the
folder.
Card Error
External memory defective
Note 2: After the completion of firmware updating, a file named "mfu-send.log" (which stores
the execution log) is created in the layer right below the "BROTHER" folder.
5-21
Confidential
1.4.11 Sensor Operational Check (Function code 32)

Function
This function allows you to check the following:
Document detection sensor (For models with ADF)

Document scanning position sensor (For models with ADF)
Registration sensor
Purge cam switch
Ink cartridge detection sensors (black, yellow, cyan, and magenta)
Ink remaining sensors (black, yellow, cyan, and magenta)
High-yield ink cartridge sensors (black, yellow, cyan, and magenta)
Disc guide sensor (For disc printing models)
Operating Procedure
The machine sounds 1100 Hz and 400 Hz tones cyclically through the following volumes
for testing the speaker:
NOTE: To stop beeping, press the Menu or OK key.

If the sensing statuses are as listed on the next page, the LCD shows
"DFDRCVRSCCP1****" and "IKIYICIMEKEYECEM," or
"SKSYSCSMORCD****" and "********VT**T1T2," which can be switched by
pressing the Black Start (Mono Start) key.
5-22
Confidential
Given below is the relationship between the LCD indication, sensor name and sensor
status.
LCD
DF
Sensors
Sensing status for display on the LCD

*1
No document detected.
*1
No document detected.
DR
Document scanning position sensor
CV
Document scanner unit closed.
RS
Registration sensor
No recording paper detected.
CC
Ink cartridge cover closed.
P1
Purge cam switch
Purge cam in any of the cam driving

positions
IK
Black ink cartridge detection sensor
Black ink cartridge loaded.
IY
Yellow ink cartridge detection sensor
Yellow ink cartridge loaded.
IC
Cyan ink cartridge detection sensor
Cyan ink cartridge loaded.
IM
Magenta ink cartridge detection sensor
Magenta ink cartridge loaded.
EK
Black ink remaining sensor
Black ink remaining.
EY
Yellow ink remaining sensor
Yellow ink remaining.
EC
Cyan ink remaining sensor
Cyan ink remaining.
EM
Magenta ink remaining sensor
Magenta ink remaining.
SK
Black high-yield ink cartridge sensor
Black high-yield ink cartridge loaded.
SY
Yellow high-yield ink cartridge sensor
Yellow high-yield ink cartridge loaded.
SC
Cyan high-yield ink cartridge sensor
Cyan high-yield ink cartridge loaded.
SM
Magenta high-yield ink cartridge sensor
Magenta high-yield ink cartridge loaded.
OR
Pressure roller depressed
CD
Disc guide sensor*2
Disc guide closed
VT
Head thermistor (for print head)
Normal temperature detected.
T1
High temperature detector 1 in the complex

IC (for main PCB)
T2
High temperature detector 2 in the complex

IC (for carriage and ASF)

(2) Change the detecting conditions (e.g., open the document scanner unit or insert paper
through the registration sensor or remove the ink cartridges), and then check that the
indication on the LCD changes according to the sensor states.
(3) To stop this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode,
5-23
Confidential
1.4.12 Backup of Machine Information (Function code 46) (User-accessible)

Function
This procedure backs up the following machine information and user setting information into
an external memory (memory card or USB flash memory) and restores it when necessary.
- Machine information (Preset values, counter values, error information, machine
specifications data, etc.)
- User setting information (Telephone directory, password, station ID, transfer information,
telephone area code, user settings, etc.)
- Other data (Received fax data, ICM/OGM data, etc.)
Note that the following information cannot be backed up.
-
Serial number of the machine

MAC address
Call and caller ID records
Activity report
Fax data to be sent (by delayed-timer, redialing, and polling)
Head calibration data
Note: The user can use the backup and restoration (given on the next page) procedures, except
"Import all" in the restoration procedure.
Note: An external memory (memory card or USB flash memory) for backup should have a free
space larger than the RAM size of the machine.
Note: When performing this procedure for any other machine with the same external memory,
delete the data previously stored in the external memory.
Note: Do not use a Memory Stick; using it may fail to transfer data correctly.
Backup Procedure
(1) On the PC, create a "Brother" folder in an external memory to be used for saving backup
data.
(2) Insert the external memory into the slot of the machine in the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
The "**** Active" appears on the LCD. (**** shows the name of the external memory
inserted.)
Note: If the external memory inserted already contains backup data of the same model, the
existing data will be overwritten with new data.
The "Export to Card" appears on the LCD.
The "********.msd" appears on the LCD. The "********" is unique to each model.
The "Export to Card" appears again on the LCD.
The "Please wait" appears on the LCD.
Note: Never remove the external memory from the machine when the exporting is in
progress.
Note: If this procedure has been started with the user-access (see Section 1.1.1), the machine
returns to the standby state after showing the "Please wait" on the LCD.
5-24
Confidential
(7) Wait for the machine to automatically return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode
and show "**** Active" on the LCD.
Remove the external memory from the machine and keep it in a safe place.
Note: If any of the error messages listed below appears, press the Stop/Exit key, and the
Error Message
Card is used
Insert Card
No file
Card Error
Machine ID Error
Cause
The external memory is being used by another operation.

No external memory is inserted.
Invalid file name
Failed to open the file.
Mismatch of serial numbers between the machine and the
backup data (which is detected only in data restoration).
Writing to an external memory failed due to insufficient
capacity.
Write Error
Restoration Procedure
(1) Insert the external memory containing the backup data into the slot of the machine in the
The "**** Active" appears on the LCD.
Note: If the serial number in the backup data stored in the external memory does not match
that of the machine, data restoration cannot be performed.

The "Export to Card" appears on the LCD.
(3) Press the
or
key until the desired item, any of the following, appears on the LCD.
"Import from Card" for restoring only user setting information

"Import all" for restoring all backup data including machine information
The "********.msd" appears on the LCD. The "********" is unique to each model.
The "Import from Card" or "Import all" appears again on the LCD.
The "Please wait" appears on the LCD.
Note: Never remove the external memory from the machine when the importing is in
progress.
(7) Wait for the machine to automatically return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode
and show "**** Active" on the LCD.
Remove the external memory from the machine and keep it in a safe place.
Note: If any of the error messages shown above appears, press the Stop/Exit key, and the
5-25
Confidential
1.4.13 Setting of Country/Language (Function code 52) (User-accessible)

Function
Machines have been customized for their destination countries with the corresponding
EEPROM customizing codes (see Section 1.4.26, Function code 74). However, some
customizing codes are shared by two or more destination countries as listed below, so the
machines customized by these codes require further specifying individual destination countries
or languages.
Usually, the user specifies the destination country or language on the LCD screen called up
automatically when turning the machine on first after purchase. In the same way, the service
personnel also specifies it if the main PCB is replaced; however, if he/she does not specify the
destination country or language at that timing, be sure to perform the procedure given below.
EEPROM Customizing Code
**53
**54
**55
**56
**57
**65
Countries
Germany and Austria

Czech, Hungary, Poland, Rumania, and Bulgaria
France, Belgium, and Netherlands
Australia and New Zealand
Norway, Sweden, Finland, and Denmark
Spain, Portugal, and Andorra
Operating Procedure
The "Set Country" or "Select Language" appears on the LCD.
Note: If an EEPROM customizing code other than those listed above has been specified,
the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode without
displaying the country/language menu.
Note: The messages shown during this procedure are in US English.
(2) Use the
and
keys to display the desired country or language.
Note: For selectable countries and languages, refer to the tables shown above.
The "*****? 1.Yes 2.No." appears on the LCD.
***** : Selected country
(4) Press the 1 key.
The machine displays "ACCEPTED" on the LCD, saves the new setting, and returns to the
initial stage of the maintenance mode. This completes the setting procedure.
5-26
Confidential
1.4.14 Transfer of Received FAX Data and/or Equipment's Log

(Function code 53) (User-accessible)
Function
This function transfers received FAX data to another machine. It is useful when the machine
cannot print received data due to the printing mechanism defective.
This function also transfers the activity report, the communications list, and the equipment log
of the machine as fax data.
Note: The number of files that can be transferred at a time is 99. To transfer 100 files or more,
carry out the following procedure more than one time.
Tip: If there are both color and monochrome data in a file to be transferred, the monochrome
data will be transferred first. If the receiver machine does not support the color function, the
sender machine cannot transfer color data, resulting in an error.
Tip: If using this function results also in an error, use Function code 46 to save received FAX
data into an external memory. (Refer to Section 1.4.12 in this chapter.)
Operating Procedure
The "FAX TRANSFER" appears on the LCD.
(2) To check the number of received files, press the 1 key.
The "1.NO. OF JOBS" appears on the LCD.
Press the OK key to display the number of received files, just as "NO. OF JOBS: 10."
Press the Stop/Exit key to return the machine to the "FAX TRANSFER" state.
(3) Select data to transfer as follows.
To transfer the activity report only, press the 2 key.
The "2.ACTIVITY" appears.
To transfer received files (together with the activity report), press the 3 key.
The "3.DOCUMENTS" appears. Note that if there is no received file, the "NO
DOCUMENTS" appears.
To transfer the communication list for the latest communication, press the 4 key.
The "4.COM.LIST (NEW)" appears.
To transfer the communication list for the last three errors, press the 5 key.
The "5.COM.LIST (ERR3)" appears.
To transfer the equipments log, press the 6 key.
The "6.MNT77 LIST" appears.
(4) With the "2.ACTIVITY," "3.DOCUMENTS," "4.COM.LIST (NEW)," "5.COM.LIST
(ERR3)," or "6.MNT77 LIST" being displayed in step (3), press the OK key.
The "ENTER NO. &OK" appears.
5-27
Confidential
(5) Enter the telephone number of the receiver machine and press the OK key again.
Note: Be sure to type the telephone number with the numerical keys. No auto-dial numbers
stored in memory can be used in this procedure.
The machine displays the "ACCEPTED" for approx. two seconds and starts dialing to
transfer data.
No station ID will be attached. A cover page and end page as shown on the next page will
be automatically attached, instead.
5-28
Confidential
Cover page sample

Title

Job number
Total number of pages to be transferred
Station ID registered in the sender equipment
FAX number of the sender equipment
Telephone number of the sender equipment
Transfer start date

%#/
$
2
/

Model code
Boot ROM info
Program manager ROM info
Main ROM info
Serial number

/
End page sample

Title

Job number
Total number of pages to be transferred
Station ID registered in the sender equipment
FAX number of the sender equipment
Telephone number of the sender equipment

Error code 1
Error code 2
Error code 3
Error code 4
Error code 5
Error code 6
Error code 7
Error code 8
Error code 9

5-29
Confidential
1.4.15 Fine Adjustment of Scanning Position (Function code 54)

Function
This function allows you to adjust the scanning position.

Operating Procedure
The "SCAN ADJ SELECT" appears on the LCD.
(2) To adjust horizontal scanning (right and left edges), press the 0 key.
The "RL EDGE *" appears on the LCD.
To adjust vertical scanning (top edge), press the 1 key.
The "TOP EDGE *" appears on the LCD.
To adjust vertical scanning (bottom edge), press the 2 key.
The "BOTM EDGE *" appears on the LCD.
An asterisk (*) in the above messages denotes the current scanning position correction
value.
NOTE: Pressing a key except 0 to 2 keys sounds a rejection beep.
(3) Enter the correction value (in units of 0.1 mm) multiplied by 10.
To increase the value by 10 (1.0 mm), press the key; to decrease it, press the key. To
increase the value by 1 (0.1 mm), press the key; to decrease it, press the key.
NOTE: Pressing the Clear key cancels the newly entered value.
NOTE: Pressing the Stop/Exit key returns the machine to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode without making changes of the correction value.
The machine displays the "ACCEPTED" on the LCD and returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
5-30
Confidential
1.4.16 Acquisition of White Level Data and CIS Scanner Area Setting
(Function code 55)
Function
This procedure allows the machine to obtain white level data for the CIS scanner and save it
together with the CIS scanner area into the EEPROM on the main PCB.
Operating Procedure
The "SCANNER AREA SET" appears on the LCD.
The machine automatically obtains white level data.
(2) If this operation completes normally, the machine returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
If any error is detected, the "SCANNER ERROR" appears on the LCD. To return the
machine to the initial stage of the maintenance mode, press the Stop/Exit key.
5-31
Confidential
1.4.17 Updating of Paper Feeding Correction Value (Function code 58)

Function
To match the paper feeding amount with the head nozzle pitch, the machine optimizes the
rotations of the paper feed roller and paper ejection roller, using the correction value stored in
the EEPROM on the main PCB.
If you replace the engine unit or head/carriage unit, you need to update the paper feeding
correction value according to the procedure given here.
Operating Procedure
Before starting the procedure below, be sure to set letter-size paper in the paper tray for
printing check patterns
For the paper feed roller adjustment
(1) On your PC, drag and drop the "pfadj.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer
driver icon in the Filedrgs window.
The machine displays the "RECEIVING DATA" on the LCD and prints out "PF-EXIT
adjust check" pattern on paper fed from the paper tray (see page 5-34 for a sample
printout).
Tip: The check pattern can also be printed with Function code 61 (refer to Section 1.4.19 in
The "Select 58?" appears on the LCD.
The "1.PF 2.EXIT" appears on the LCD.
(4) To select the paper feed roller adjustment, press the 1 key.
The "PF1 ADJ NO. +0" appears on the LCD.
(5) On the "PF-EXIT adjust check" pattern printed in step (1) (see page 5-34), check each of
PF1 through PF6 rows sequentially. First, on PF1 row, select the block that is the least
uneven print and enter the number of the least uneven block.
For example, if the number of the least uneven block is +4, press the 4 key while the "PF1
ADJ NO. +0" is displayed on the LCD. If the number is -4, press the key to display the
"PF1 ADJ NO. -0" and press the 4 key.
If it is difficult to judge which block is the least uneven print between the adjacent two
blocks, e.g., between +2 and +4 blocks, enter the number (+3 in this case) between them.
Then press the OK key.
(6) In the same way as in step (5), enter the number of the least uneven block for each of PF2
through PF6.
For the paper ejection roller adjustment
(1) On your PC, drag and drop the "exitadj.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer
The machine displays the "Receiving Data" on the LCD and prints out "EXIT adjust
check" patterns 1 to 3 (see pages 5-35 to 5-37 for a sample printout).
5-32
Confidential

(4) To select the paper ejection roller adjustment, press the 2 key.
The "EXIT ADJ NO. +0" appears on the LCD.
(5) On the "EXIT adjust check" patterns 1 to 3 (see pages 5-35 through 5-37), check EXIT1
through EXIT6 rows.
First, on the EXIT1 row, select the block that is the least uneven print and enter the number
of the least uneven block. For the entry method, refer to the paper feed roller adjustment
procedure, step (5).
If it is difficult to judge which block is the least uneven print between the adjacent two
blocks, e.g., between +2 and +4 blocks, enter the number (+3 in this case) between them.
Press the OK key.
(6) In the same way as in step (5), enter the number of the least uneven block for each of
EXIT2 through EXIT6.
For adjustment of horizontal streaks
(1) On your PC, drag and drop the "LF300adj.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer
The machine displays the "Receiving Data" on the LCD and prints out "KEISEN2 &
LF300 & EXIT ADJUST PATTERN" (see page 5-38 for a sample printout).
(4) Press the
key several times to display the "1.LF300" on the LCD.
(5) Press the 1 key to display the "LF300 ADJ No. +0."
(6) Check the LF300 ADJUST pattern (see page 5-38), select the block that has the least white
and black streaks, and enter the number of that block. For the entry method, refer to the
paper feed roller adjustment procedure, step (5).
5-33
Confidential
Paper feed
roller
PF-EXIT Adjust Check Pattern
5-34
Confidential
EXIT Adjust Check Pattern 1
5-35
Confidential
5-36
Confidential
5-37
Confidential
KEISEN2 & LF300 & EXIT ADJUST PATTERN
5-38
Confidential
1.4.18 Checking of CIS Travel and Specifying of CIS Type (Function code 59)
Function
This procedure allows you to check the movement of the CIS unit integrated in the document
scanner unit. The CIS unit travels to the three positions--the white reference film position,
scanning start and end positions.
It also allows you to specify the CIS type into the EEPROM on the main PCB. If you replace
the main PCB, you need to specify the CIS type according to the procedure given below.
Operating Procedure
-- Check the movement of the CIS unit -(1) Press the 5 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "1:MO 2:CO 3:CHG?" appears on the LCD.
(2) To call up the CIS travel menu, press the 1 key.
(The "2:CO" is for checking scanning clocks at the factory, so do not access it.)
The "RESO TYPE SET 1" appears on the LCD.
The "LED PWM :
**" appears on the LCD.

The "G PULSE :
****" appears on the LCD.

The "1:WHT 2:FRT 3:MV" appears.
(6) Press the 3, 1, or 2 key, then press the OK key.
The CIS unit moves to the scanning end position, white reference film position, or scanning
start position, respectively.
(7) Press the Stop/Exit key, and the CIS unit returns to the home position.
The machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
-- Specify the CIS type -(1) Press the 5 and 9 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The "1:MO 2:CO 3:CHG?" appears on the LCD.
(2) To specify the CIS type, press the 3 key.
The machine automatically specifies the CIS type and returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
(The "1:MO" is for checking the CIS travel, as described above. The "2:CO" is for
checking scanning clocks at the factory, so do not access it.)
5-39
Confidential
1.4.19 Printout of PRN/JPEG Files in Memory Card (Function code 61)

Function
This procedure prints PRN files and JPEG files stored in a memory card supported by
PhotoCapture Center.
The following four print modes are available.
- Printing the specified file once
- Printing the specified file repeatedly
- Printing all PRN/JPEG files once
- Printing all PRN/JPEG files repeatedly
File name requirements
PRN file: Maximum of 16 characters consisting of alphanumerics, underline "_" and
parentheses "( )", including the extension .prn
JPEG file: Maximum of 16 characters consisting of alphanumerics, underline "_" and
parentheses "( )", including the extension .jpg
The maximum number of files is 999.
Operating Procedure
The "MAINTENANCE 61" appears on the LCD.
(2) To print a PRN file(s), press the # key; to print a JPEG file(s), press the * key.
Files of the selected type appear on the LCD.
(3) To print the specified file once, select the target file with the
To print the specified file repeatedly, select the target file with the
6 key.
keys and press the 4 key.

/
keys and press the
To print all files of the selected type once, press the 7 key.
To print all files of the selected type repeatedly, press the 9 key.
The machine starts printing. Upon completion of printing, the machine returns to the initial
Printing the Stop/Exit key halfway through printing immediately stops printing and goes back
to the state of step (1) above.
5-40
Confidential
1.4.20 Travel Check of the Head/Carriage Unit and Operational Check of the Pressure
Roller (Function code 63)
Function
This procedure moves the head/carriage unit to the adjustment position (Function code 63 + *).
It also checks releasing and depressing of the pressure roller provided on disc printing models
(Function code 63 + #).
Operating Procedure
The "SELECT 63?" appears on the LCD.
The "START 63" appears on the LCD.
(3) To move the head/carriage unit to the adjustment position, press the * key.
The machine moves the head/carriage unit to the adjustment position and displays "HEAD
ADJ?" on the LCD.
After completion of head replacement or adjustment, press the Stop/Exit key. The machine
moves the head/carriage unit back to the home position, locks it, and returns to the initial
(4) To make an operational check of the pressure roller, perform steps (1) and (2) again and
then press the # key.
The machine displays the "PF ROLL RELEASE" on the LCD and releases the pressure
roller.
After checking of the pressure roller, press the Stop/Exit key. The machine depresses the
pressure roller, moves the head/carriage unit back to the home position, locks it, and
returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
If the machine fails to release or depress the pressure roller, it returns to the initial stage of
the maintenance mode and displays Error 91 or 92.
5-41
Confidential
1.4.21 Alignment of Vertical Print Lines in Monochrome (Function code 65)

Function
This procedure aligns vertical lines printed in the forward and backward directions of the head/
carriage unit.
If the head/carriage unit, main PCB, engine unit, or carriage motor is replaced, you need to
make the adjustment given in this section.
Note: If the head/carriage unit or the engine unit is replaced, you need also to adjust the
inclination of the head/carriage unit (refer to Chapter 4, Section 1.4).
Operating Procedure
Before starting the procedure below, be sure to set letter-size or A4-size paper in the paper tray
for printing check patterns.
(1) Press the 6 and 5 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode. Then press
the 1 key in succession.
The machine displays the "PRINTING" on the LCD and prints the vertical alignment check
pattern of A to D rows (see the next page for a sample printout). Each of A to D rows
consists of #1 through #9 blocks.
The "A No. (1-9)" appears on the LCD.
(2) Check the A row, find which number block shows most indistinct vertical lines, and then
enter that block number.
The "B No. (1-9)" appears on the LCD.
(3) Check the B row, find which number block shows most indistinct vertical lines, and then
enter that block number.
The "C No. (1-9)" appears on the LCD.
(4) In the same way, enter the block number of most indistinct vertical lines for the C and D
rows.
The machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
Note: If the 1 or 9 key is pressed in any of steps (2) to (4) above, the machine shows
"PRINTING" on the LCD and prints the vertical alignment check pattern again. Go back to step
(2) and make adjustments again.
5-42
Confidential
Vertical Alignment Check Pattern
5-43
Confidential
1.4.22 Margin Adjustment in Borderless Printing (Function code 66)

(User-accessible)
Function
This procedure adjusts the left, right, top and bottom margins for borderless printing. Print out a
margin check pattern, measure each margin, and enter the correction values.
Operating Procedure
Before starting the procedure below, be sure to set letter-size paper in the paper tray for
printing check patterns.
Top/left/right margin adjustment
(1) On your PC, drag and drop the "mediaadj_disc_mini11.prn" onto the Brother Maintenance
USB Printer driver icon in the Filedrgs window.
The machine displays the "Receiving Data" on the LCD and prints out the "MEDIA
CHECK" pattern (see page 5-47 for a sample printout).
Tip: For models not supporting disc printing, the "mediaadj_mini11.prn" can also be used
instead of "mediaadj_disc_mini11.prn."
(2) Measure the top, left and right margins on the printed pattern.
The upper row of the left and right margins is for printing in 600 dpi, the middle row, for
printing in 1200 dpi, and the lower row, for disc printing.
(Example) Top margin: 2.7 mm*
Left margin:
Right margin:
Upper row
in 600 dpi
2.8 mm
3.1 mm
Middle row
in 1200 dpi
2.9 mm
3.2 mm
Lower row
in disc printing*
3.0 mm
3.3 mm
*For disc printing models
If all the top, left and right margins are within the range from 2.9 to 3.1 mm, no adjustment
is required. If not, go to step (3).
(3) If either one of the top, left and right margins is out of the specified range, press the 6 key
twice.
The "MEDIA SENSOR ADJ" appears on the LCD.
(5) Press the * key.
Disc printing models Wait for "TOP :30" to appear on the LCD and go to step (6).
Other models Wait for "LEFT1 :30" to appear on the LCD and go to step (7).
(6) To adjust the top margin, enter the measured top value (in units of 0.1 mm) multiplied by
10.
In this example, the top margin measured in step (2) is 2.7 mm, so press the 2, 7, and OK
keys in this order.
The "LEFT1 :30" appears on the LCD.
5-44
Confidential
(7) To adjust the left margin in 600 dpi, enter the measured left margin value (in units of 0.1
mm) multiplied by 10.
In this example, the left margin measured in step (2) is 2.8 mm, so press the 2, 8, and OK
keys in this order.
The "RIGHT1 :30" appears on the LCD.
(8) To adjust the right margin in 600 dpi, enter the measured right margin value (in units of 0.1
In this example, the right margin measured in step (2) is 3.1 mm, so press the 3, 1, and OK
keys.
(9) To adjust the left margin in 1200 dpi, enter the measured left margin value (in units of 0.1
keys in this order.
(10) To adjust the right margin in 1200 dpi, enter the measured right margin value (in units of
0.1 mm) multiplied by 10.
keys.
Note: Models not supporting disc printing return to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode. Go to step (13).
(11) Disc printing models To adjust the left margin in 1200 dpi for disc printing, enter the
measured left margin value (in units of 0.1 mm) multiplied by 10.
keys in this order.
(12) Disc printing models To adjust the right margin in 1200 dpi for disc printing, enter the
measured right margin value (in units of 0.1 mm) multiplied by 10.
keys in this order.
(13) Print out the "MEDIA CHECK" pattern (see page 5-47 for a sample printout) again, as
instructed in step (1).
(14) Measure the top, left and right margins on the printed pattern.
If all the top, left and right margins are within the range from 2.9 to 3.1 mm, the adjustment
is completed.
Bottom margin adjustment
(1) Measure the bottom margin on the "MEDIA CHECK" pattern printed in step (1) of the top/
left/right margin adjustment procedure.
(Example) Bottom margin: 3.2 mm
If it is within the range from 2.9 to 3.1 mm, no adjustment is required. If not, go to step (2).
5-45
Confidential
(2) If the bottom margin is out of the specified range, press the 6 key twice.
The "MEDIA SENSOR ADJ" appears on the LCD.
(4) Press the # key to display "BOTTOM :30."
(5) To adjust the bottom margin, enter the measured bottom value (in units of 0.1 mm)
multiplied by 10.
In this example, the bottom margin measured in step (1) is 3.2 mm, so press the 3, 2, and
OK keys.
(6) Go back to step (1) of the top/left/right margin adjustment procedure and print out the
"MEDIA CHECK" pattern again.
(7) Measure the bottom margin on the printed pattern.
If it is within the range from 2.9 to 3.1 mm, the adjustment is completed.
Note: To reset the correction values newly entered in the above procedure, press the 6, 6, Black
Start (Mono Start), 8, 9, 5 and 4 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
The machine shows "PARAMETER INIT" on the LCD and returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
5-46
Confidential
Left, Right, Top and Bottom Margin Check Pattern
5-47
Confidential
1.4.23 Updating of Head Property Data and Backup/Restoration of Head Calibration

Data (Function code 68)
Function
Function code 68 provides two types of procedures--one for updating the head property data
and the other for backing up the head calibration data and restoring it.
Updating the head property data
To keep the print quality, the machine optimizes the drive conditions of individual head/
carriage units according to the head property data.
The property data is stored in the EEPROM on the main PCB and its property code is printed on
the property labels attached to the machine and the head/carriage unit.
If you replace the head/carriage unit, you need to enter its property code printed on the property
label (that comes with the new spare part) and replace the old property label on the machine
(see Appendix 1 for the label location) with the new one. If the old part may be used in future,
store the old property label also with the old part.
Backing up the head calibration data and restoring it
This procedure backs up the head calibration data into an external memory (memory card or
USB flash memory) and restores it to the machine.
Head Property Data Updating Procedure
(2) Press the 2, 5, 8, and 0 keys in this order.
The current property data stored in the EEPROM appears on the LCD and the machine is
ready for entry.
(3) Check the property label that comes with a new head/carriage unit and then enter the
property code.
The code to be entered is 10 digits excluding the heading alphabets.
Models with numerical keypad on the control panel

To enter letters "A" through "F," press the 1 through 6 keys while holding down the # key,
respectively.
The machine beeps, shows the "Input Accepted" on the LCD, and writes the entered
property code into the EEPROM. Then it returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.
NOTE: If the entered data contains any checksum error, the machine beeps, shows the
"Input Error" and becomes ready to accept entry. Go back to step (3).
5-48
Confidential
Head Calibration Data Backup/Restoration Procedures
Backup procedure
The "Write Head Calib" appears on the LCD.
(3) Insert an external memory into the memory slot.
(4) Use the
key.
and
keys to display "Head Calib->Media" on the LCD and then press the OK
The machine displays "Now Saving" on the LCD and starts the backup operation.
Note: If no external memory is inserted into the memory slot in step (3), the machine
sounds a short beep three times and displays "No Media Error" on the LCD.
Upon completion of the backup operation, the machine beeps for one second, displays
"Head Calib.data" on the LCD, and then returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.
Restoration procedure
The "Write Head Calib" appears on the LCD.
(3) Insert the external memory holding the head property data into the memory slot.
(4) Use the
key.
and
keys to display "Media->Head Calib" on the LCD and then press the OK
The machine displays "Now Loading" on the LCD and starts the restoration operation.
Note: If no external memory is inserted into the memory slot in step (3), the machine
sounds a short beep three times and displays "No Media Error" on the LCD.
Note: If the external memory inserted in step (3) holds no head calibration data, the "Cant
Open File" appears on the LCD.
Upon completion of the restoration operation, the machine beeps for one second, displays
"Complete" on the LCD, and then returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
5-49
Confidential
1.4.24 Traveling Speed Check of Head/Carriage Unit (Function code 69)

Function
This procedure checks whether the traveling speed of the head/carriage unit is within the
specified range.
Be sure to perform this procedure if you replace the head/carriage unit, carriage motor or CR
encoder strip, loosen the CR timing belt, or apply lubricant.
Operating Procedure
The machine shows "CR AGING" on the LCD and starts aging of the head/carriage unit.
In each of travel speeds of 57.7, 43.3, 26.7 and 21.7 inches/second (ips), the machine
checks whether the maximum and minimum traveling speeds of the head/carriage unit are
within the specified range.
- If the maximum and minimum speeds in all of the four traveling speeds are within the
specified range, the "57O 43O 27O 21O" appears on the LCD
- If any one is out of the range, the machine shows some message, e.g., "57O 43O 27O
21X" on the LCD. This sample message indicates that the speed variation is within the
allowable range when the head/carriage unit travels at 57.7, 43.3 and 26.7 inches/
second; however, it is out of the range at 21.7 inches/second.
5-50
Confidential
1.4.25 Cleaning of Leveler Roller (LR) ASSY (Function code 70)

Function
This procedure clears ink sticking to the leveler roller (LR) ASSY.
Operating Procedure
(1) Fold a sheet of A4- or letter-size recording paper in half in a longitudinal direction, unfold
it, and set it in the empty paper tray with the valley fold facing up as shown below.
The "1.A4 2.LTR" appears on the LCD.
(3) To use an A4-size paper, press the 1 key; to use a letter-size one, press the 2 key.
The machine shows "LRS CLEANING" on the LCD and starts cleaning the leveler roller
(LR) ASSY.
(4) Wait for the cleaning to complete (it takes approximately four minutes) and for the "PUSH
STOP KEY" to appear on the LCD.
(5) Press the Stop/Exit key.
The machine ejects the recording paper and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.
(3_037a)
(Cleaning_leveler_roller_mini11)
Valley fold
5-51
Confidential
1.4.26 EEPROM Customizing (Function code 74)

Function
This procedure customizes the EEPROM according to language, function settings, and
firmware switch settings.
Notes:
If you replace the main PCB, be sure to carry out this procedure.
Once this procedure is carried out, it is necessary to write the corresponding
language data, so be sure to write local programs (refer to Chapter 4, Section 2.1.2).
Operating Procedure
The "SELECT 74?" appears on the LCD.
(2) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key, and the current customizing code appears.
(3) Enter the desired customizing code. (See the following pages.)
The newly entered code appears.
NOTE: If a wrong 4-digit code is entered, the machine will malfunction.
The "Please DL ROM" appears on the LCD.
(5) With the "Please DL ROM" displayed, connect the machine to your PC.
(6) On the PC, run "filedg32.exe" to display the Filedrgs window. Drag and drop the target
firmware onto the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver icon in that window.
If you press the Stop/Exit key or no keys are pressed for one minute in the above procedure, the
machine stops the procedure and returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
5-52
Confidential
EEPROM Customizing Codes List

US
Can
UK
Ger
Destination
US,
Mexico
Canada
UK
Germany
Country code
01
02
04
DCPJ525W
---
---
0004
DCPJ725W
---
---
0004
DCPJ925W
---
---
0004
MFCJ280
MFCJ425W
MFCJ430W
MFCJ435W
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
MFCJ835DW
0001
0101
0001
0301
0001
0001
0101
0002
0102
0002
0302
0002
0002
0102
----0004
--0004
0004
---
03
0053
(0003/0014)
0053
(0003/0014)
0053
(0003/0014)
----0003
--0003
0003
---
Spa
Port
Spain
Portugal
Country code
Ita
Italy,
San Marino,
Vatican
16
15
18
DCPJ525W
0016
0015
0018
DCPJ725W
---
0015
0018
DCPJ925W
0016
0015
0018
MFCJ280
---
---
---
MFCJ430W
0016
0015
0018
MFCJ625DW
0016
0015
0018
MFCJ825DW
0016
0015
0018
Destination
5-53
Ibe
Spain,
Portugal,
Andorra
65
0065
(0015/0018)
0065
(0015/0018)
0065
(0015/0018)
--0065
(0015/0018)
0065
(0015/0018)
0065
(0015/0018)
Fra
France, French Polynesia, Ivory
Coast, Morocco, Algeria,
Monaco, New Caledonia,
Reunion, Senegal, Tunisia
05
0055
(0005/0008/0009/0004)
0055
(0005/0008/0009/0004)
0055
(0005/0008/0009/0004)
----0005
--0005
0005
--Swi
Hol
Switzerland,
Liechtenstein
Netherlands
10
09
---
---
0004
---
0004
---
---
---
0010
0009
---
0009
0010
0009
Confidential
Bel
Destination
Pan Nordic
for Elkjop
Belgium,
Luxemburg
Norway, Sweden, Finland,

Denmark, Iceland
Country code
08
DCPJ525W
---
DCPJ725W
---
DCPJ925W
---
MFCJ280
---
MFCJ430W
0008
MFCJ625DW
0008
MFCJ825DW
0008
57
0057
(0007)
0057
(0007)
0057
(0007)
--0057
(0007/0026/0012/0013)
0057
(0007/0026/0012/0013)
---
Russia
Aus
General
14
Czech Republic,
Hungary, Poland,
Bulgaria,
Montenegro, Serbia,
Slovak Republic,
Slovenia, Croatia,
Romania, Macedonia,
Albania, Bosnia and
Herzegovina,
Moldova,
Greece, Malta,
Cyprus, Estonia,
Latvia, Lithuania
88
0014
0054
---
0014
0054
---
0014
0054
---
---
---
---
0014
0054
0054
0014
0054
0004
0014
---
0004
Austria
Sin/Gulf
Singapore, Thailand, Malaysia, Philippines,
Vietnam, Indonesia, India, UAE, Afghanistan,
Angola, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Bangladesh,
Botswana, Brunei, Cambodia, Congo,
Russia, Belarus,
Kazakhstan, Ukraine, Djibouti, Egypt, Ethiopia, Ghana, Iran, Iraq,
Destination
Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Laos, Lebanon,
Armenia, Uzbekistan,
Lesotho, Libya, Macao, Madagascar, Malawi,
Kyrgyz Republic,
Georgia, Tajikistan, Maldives, Mauritius, Myanmar, Mozambique,
Turkmenistan, Moldova Namibia, Nepal, Nigeria, Oman, Pakistan,
Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Seychelles, Somalia, Sri
Lanka, Sudan, Swaziland, Syria, Tanzania,
Uganda, Yemen, Zambia, Zimbabwe
Country code
48
40
DCPJ525W
0048
--DCPJ725W
--0004
DCPJ925W
----MFCJ280
----MFCJ430W
0048
0040
MFCJ625DW
--0040
MFCJ825DW
0048
0040
5-54
Israel
Israel
17
Turkey
Turkey
25
0054
0054
0054
--0054
0054
---
Confidential
HK
Destination
Hong Kong
Country code
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725W
DCPJ925W
MFCJ280
28
---------
MFCJ430W
0028
MFCJ432W
---
MFCJ625DW
0028
MFCJ825DW
0028
Destination
Country code
DCPJ525W
DCPJ725W
DCPJ925W
MFCJ280
MFCJ430W
MFCJ625DW
MFCJ825DW
Oceania
Australia, New Zealand, Papua
New Guinea, Rarotonga, Fiji,
Samoa, Tonga, Vanuatu
56
0004
0004
0004
--0056
(0006/0027)
0256
(0006/0027)
0056
(0006/0027)
0056
(0006/0027)
Brazil
Argentina
Brazil
Argentina, Uruguay, Paraguay
42
--------0042
-----
31
--------0040
--0040
Korea
Taiwan
China
Korea
Taiwan
China
44
---------
23
---------
20
---------
0044
0023
0020
---
---
---
0044
0023
0020
0044
0023
0020
Chile
Chile, Peru,
Bolivia
36
--------0040
--0040
Poland
Indonesia
Poland
India, Indonesia
39
0054
0054
0054
--0039
0039
0039
29
0004
-------0040
--
The above information is as of April 2011. The up-to-date information is available from your local Brother Customer
Service.
5-55
Confidential
1.4.27 Travel of Head/Carriage Unit (for removing paper particles and dust
accumulated on the maintenance unit) (Function code 75)
(User-accessible)
Function
This function is used to remove paper particles and dust accumulated between the maintenance
unit and head/carriage unit. Using this function moves the head/carriage unit to the center of its
travel, allowing you to easily remove the paper particles and dust accumulated.
Operating Procedure
The "PLS OPEN COVER" appears on the LCD.
(2) Open the document scanner unit.
The head/carriage unit moves to the center of its travel.
(3) Remove the paper particles and dust accumulated.
(4) Close the document scanner unit.
The head/carriage unit moves back to the home position and the machine returns to the
TIP: Holding down the Stop/Exit key with the document scanner unit opened for more than
five seconds can also move the head/carriage unit in the same manner as above.
5-56
Confidential
1.4.28 Purge Operation (Function code 76) (User-accessible)

Function
The machine can carry out several types of purge operations--normal purge, periodical reset
purge, power purge, initial purge, user reset purge, and engine setup purge. This function allows
you to select the desired purge type and carry it out.
TIP: The purge types and their details are described on the next page.
Operating Procedure
The machine displays the "CLEANING ALL" on the LCD and enters the purge mode.
(2) Press the
and
key to display the target color for purge.
Each time the

or
key is pressed, the "CLEANING ALL," "CLEANING BLACK,"
"CLEANING MAGENTA," "CLEANING CYAN," or "CLEANING YELLOW" appears
cyclically.
"CLEANING ALL": Purge for all four color inks
"CLEANING BLACK": Purge for black ink
"CLEANING MAGENTA" / "CLEANING CYAN" / "CLEANING YELLOW": Any color
choice performs purge for all three color inks.
(3) Enter the purge code according to the table on the next page.
The LCD displays "Cleaning."
Upon completion of purging, the machine automatically returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
5-57
Confidential
Purge types, ink usage, purge counts, and purge codes
Purge Types
Normal purge
Description
Ink Usage
This purge operation

removes dried ink sticking
to the head nozzles.
Black:
Periodical reset
purge
This purge operation

removes air bubbles that
have accumulated in the ink
supply tubes.
Black:
Power purge
More powerful than a

periodical reset purge, this
purge operation is for
removing stubborn clogging
from the head nozzles and
ink supply tubes.
Black:
When the user loads ink

cartridges for the first time,
this purge operation
automatically runs to refill
the ink supply tubes and
print head with fresh ink.
Black:
This purge operation should

be performed if the print
quality problem persists
after a user has performed
the purge operation
repeatedly by pressing the
Ink (Ink Management)
key.
Black:
This purge operation refills

the ink supply tubes with ink
when there is no ink in those
tubes.
Black:
Initial purge
User reset purge
Engine setup
purge
0.240 ml
Per color: 0.217 ml

0.520 ml
Per color: 0.463 ml
0.680 ml
Per color: 0.541 ml
3.460 ml
Per color: 2.930 ml
0.650 ml
Per color: 0.503 ml
3.460 ml
Per color: 2.930 ml
Purge Counts
Purge Codes
(In the
maintenance
mode, Function
code 76)
All:
42
Black: 11
3 colors: 31
All:
72
Black: 23
3 colors: 66
All:
88
Black: 30
3 colors: 74
All:
537
Black: 156
3 colors: 398
All:
81
Black: 29
3 colors: 69
All:
537
Black: 156
3 colors: 398
The above information is as of April 2011.
This machine counts all purge operations and flushing operations performed since produced in
order to prevent the ink absorber box and flushing box from overflowing with drained and
flushed ink, respectively. An initial purge, for example, advances by 537.
When the purge or flushing count approaches 10750 or 660336587, respectively, the "Unable to
Clean 46" appears, and further purge or flushing operations are prohibited. Replace the ink
absorber box or flushing box, and then reset the corresponding count. (Refer to the next page
for the reset procedure.)
5-58
Confidential
Resetting purge or flushing count
1) Switch the machine to the maintenance mode.

2) Press the 8 and 0 keys in this order in the initial stage of the maintenance mode to call
up the machine's log information. (Function code 80. Refer to Section 1.4.31 in this
chapter.)
3) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key several times until the purge or flushing count
appears on the LCD.
4) Press the 2, 7, 8, and 3 keys in this order to reset the purge or flushing count.
5) Press the Stop/Exit key to return the machine to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.
6) Press the 9 key twice to return to the standby state.
5-59
Confidential
1.4.29 Print of the Equipments Log (Function code 77)

Function
The machine prints out its log information or saves it into an external memory.
Operating Procedure
Printing
The machine displays "MAINTENANCE 77" on the LCD and prints out the equipments
log as shown below.
Upon completion of the printing, the machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance
mode.
Saving into an external memory
(1) Insert an external memory into the machine in the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
"**** Active" appears on the LCD (where "****" is the name of the inserted external
memory).
(2) Press the 7 key twice to display "Print out."
(3) Use the
and
keys to change the display to "Save data."

The LCD shows "*******.csv" (where "*******" is "Model name + Lower 9 digits of the
machines serial number").
Upon completion of the saving, "*******.csv" disappears and the machine returns to the
5-60
Confidential
Real-time clock (RTC) check result

RTC backup check result (not required for servicing)
Model code
Country code (See Section 1.4.26 in this chapter.)
Checksum of WSW, PSW, USW, and FSW (not required for servicing)
Version and production date of main firmware
Version and production date of sub firmware
Version and production date of boot firmware
Head property code
CIS type/Engine type/LCD type
PictBridge information
(shown only on models supporting PictBridge/USB flash memory drive)
Ink drop count, indicating how many droplets have been jetted out from each of the
current ink cartridges (including droplets used for purging)
Ink drop count after detection of "Ink Low," indicating how many droplets have been
jetted out from each of the current ink cartridges after detection of "Ink Low"
Ink drop count, indicating how many droplets have been jetted out onto the platen in
borderless printing
Total ink drop count, indicating how many droplets the machine has jetted out from
each of the ink cartridges since produced (excluding droplets used for purging)
Ink cartridge change count
Upper left: Standard-yield, color ink cartridge
Upper right: Standard-yield, black ink cartridge
Lower left: High-yield, color ink cartridge
Lower right: High-yield, black ink cartridge
(The BK/YL/CY/MZ on the printed equipments log indicate the slot positions in the
ink refill ASSY.)
Ink cartridge detection failure count, indicating how many times an undetectable
cartridge has been inserted
Total printed page count/Total jam count
Print history for paper sizes and types
Total printed page count (black/color)/A3 and ledger (black/color)/Other sizes (black/
color)
Printed page count for PC print, copy, fax & list & report, memory card, and test print
Printed page count for paper size and paper type
Plain paper/Inkjet paper/Glossy paper
Total page count in duplex printing/Jam count in duplex printing/Paper feed roller
cleaning count in duplex printing (The cleaning count is not required for servicing.)
Total copy page count in duplex printing//Total PC print count in duplex printing
Printed page count for paper size and paper type in duplex printing
A3, A4: Plain paper only
4 x 6: Plain paper - inkjet paper - glossy paper
Total printed label count/Total label jam count (Always 0 on models not supporting
label printing)
5-61
Confidential
ADF scanning page count/Flat-bed scanning page count/ADF paper jam count/FAX
scanning count/Scanner count
Home positioning error code of the CIS unit/Home positioning detection log data (See
Function code 80. Refer to Section 1.4.31 in this chapter.)
Purge count/Wiper count/Flushing count
Purge count by purge type (automatic/manual)
eIP: Engine setup purge count
uIP: Initial purge count
RP: Periodical reset purge count
SRP: Small reset purge count
SP: Periodical suction purge count
RP2: Periodical vent purge count
CP: Ink cartridge replacement purge count
NP: Normal purge count
RP3: User reset purge count
PP: Power reset purge count
QPP: Power purge count
tFL: Periodical flushing count (only after color printing)
Total power-ON time
Machine error history (Error code : Date and time of occurrence : Machine temperature
at the time of occurrence)
Communications error history (Error code : Date and time of occurrence)
Initial purge log (FF: Normal end)
Machine information backup file version
Sensor status (See Function code 32 for sensor names.)
Ink cartridge type loaded in each slot
0: No cartridge loaded
1: Standard-yield, color ink cartridge
2: Standard-yield, black ink cartridge
3: High-yield color ink cartridge
4: High-yield black ink cartridge
*: Unidentifiable ink cartridge
Not required for servicing
Not required for servicing
Timing info and damage info when Error EC has occurred
T: Timing info
(0: No error, 1: Error at the start of operation, 2: Error during usual operation)
E: Expected value of information read
R: Damaged value of information read
Reset count*/Power-ON duration at the time of last reset
*Excluding
the resets triggered by the following

Function codes 01 and 91
Function code 80 (Resetting the purge and flushing counts)
5-62
Confidential
1.4.30 Adjustment of Touch Panel (Function code 78)

Function
This function adjusts the detection area on the touch panel.

NOTE: The adjustment procedure requires a stylus with a thin tip. A commercially available
stylus designed for electronic dictionaries or personal digital assistance (PDA) can be used. If
you do not have it on hand, order the "TOUCH PEN" from the Brothers parts list.
Operating Procedure
The adjustment screens shown below appear on the LCD.
(2) Touch the symbols on the touch panel with a stylus in the order of top-left, bottom-left,
bottom-right, top-right, and the center. After a symbol touched disappears, touch the next
one.
NOTE: Do not use tools other than a pen designed for touch panels. Especially, never use a
pointed one, e.g., a screwdriver. Using such a tool damages the touch panel.
NOTE: Do not touch the touch panel with fingers. The contact area of a finger is too large
to adjust the touch panel precisely.
NOTE: If no keys are pressed for one minute in the above procedure or you press the Stop/
Exit key, the machine stops the procedure and returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
5-63
Confidential
After the fifth symbol (center) is pressed, the "OK" appears if the adjustment is normally
completed. After approx. three seconds, the machine returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
NOTE: If the touch panel is improperly pressed or a wrong point is pressed, the "NG"
appears on the LCD. After approx. three seconds, the screen returns to the state in step (2).
Start pressing the five symbols again from the first one (top-left).
If the "NG" appears, repeat this procedure two or three times. If the "NG" persists even
after that, check the touch panel harness for a contact failure, breakage, or short-circuit. If
the "NG" continues to be displayed without any of such problems, replace the LCD unit.
5-64
Confidential
1.4.31 Display of the Equipment's Log (Function code 80) (User-accessible)

Function
The machine can display its log information on the LCD.

Operating Procedure
The calendar clock appears on the LCD.
(2) Press the Black Start (Mono Start) key to call up the following log information items on
the LCD, one by one.
Tip: Resetting the purge and flushing counts (Items in the shaded fields in the table
below)
When one of the log items in the shaded fields is displayed, pressing the 2, 7, 8, and 3 keys
in this order resets the displayed log information to zero.
00:00 00:00 OK
RTC backup check (not required for servicing)
8CA***
Model code
COUNTRY:
Country code (See Section 1.4.26 in this chapter.)
SWITCH:
Checksum of WSW, PSW, USW, and FSW (not required for servicing)
MAIN:
Version and production date of main firmware
********
Checksum of main firmware
P****
Version and production date of sub firmware
B****
Version and production date of boot firmware
S/N:*1
ALR****
Head property code
CISF:
CIS type (Function code 59)

Engine type (not required for servicing)
ENGINE:
PICTBRIDGE:
*2
(Shown only on models supporting PictBridge/USB flash memory
drive)
DOT K:*3
Ink drop count, indicating how many droplets have been jetted out from
each of the current ink cartridges (including droplets used for purging)
SEN K:*3
Ink drop count after detection of "Ink Low," indicating how many
droplets have been jetted out from each of the current ink cartridges
after the ink remaining sensor detects "Ink Low."
PLA K:*3
Ink drop count, indicating how many droplets have been jetted out onto
the platen in borderless printing
LK:*3
Total ink drop count, indicating how many droplets the machine has
jetted out from each of the ink cartridges since produced
(excluding droplets used for purging)
INK CH BK:*3
Ink cartridge change count (Standard-yield, color ink cartridge)

(The BK/YL/CY/MZ on the LCD indicate the slot positions in the ink
refill ASSY.)
INK CH2 BK:*3
Ink cartridge change count (Standard-yield, black ink cartridge)

refill ASSY.)
INK CH3 BK:*3
Ink cartridge change count (High-yield, color ink cartridge)

refill ASSY.)
5-65
Confidential
INK CH4 BK:*3
Ink cartridge change count (High-yield, black ink cartridge)

refill ASSY.)
CHGMISS_BK:*3
Ink cartridge detection failure count, indicating how many times an

undetectable cartridge has been inserted
PAGE:*4
Total printed page count, indicating how many pages have been printed
since the machine was produced
JAM:
Jam count, indicating how many times a paper jam has occurred.
*5
PC print page count, indicating how many pages the machine has
printed as an output device of the connected PC
PC:
COPY:*5
Total number of copies
FAX:*5
Total number of fax/list/report prints
MEDIA:
Memory card print page count, indicating how many pages have been
printed from the memory card data (On models without PhotoCapture
Center, this counter is always fixed at "0.")
TEST PRINT:
Total number of test prints
A3P:
*6
Print history for paper sizes and types
DX_P:
Total page count in duplex printing, indicating how many pages have
been printed in duplex printing since the machine was produced
DX_JAM:
Jam count in duplex printing
DX_CLEAN:
Paper feed roller cleaning count in duplex printing (not required for
servicing)
DX_PC:
PC print page count in duplex printing, indicating how many pages the
machine has printed as an output device of the connected PC
DX_CLCOPY:
Color copy page count in duplex printing, indicating how many copies
have been made in color
DX_MNCOPY:
Black copy page count in duplex printing, indicating how many copies
have been made in monochrome
DX_A3P:*7
Total A4 page count in duplex printing, indicating how many A4 pages

have been printed since the machine was produced
CD PAGE:
Total disc printed page count
CD JAM:
Total jam count in disc printing
PURGE:
Purge count, indicating how many times the purge operation has been
carried out
eIP_BK:*8
Purge history for purge types of black ink
eIP_CL:*8
Purge history for purge types of color inks
WIPE:
Wiper count, indicating how many times the wiper operation has been
carried out
FLUSH:
Flushing count, indicating how many times the flushing operation has
been carried out
Total power-ON time
POWER:
MACHINE_ERR_1
*9
Machine error history
ADF_JAM:
ADF paper jam count, indicating how many times a paper jam has
occurred (Shown on models with ADF)
FB:*10
Flat-bed page count, indicating how many documents have been

scanned
HP_ERR_CODE:*11
HP_LOG1:
*12
Home positioning error code of CIS unit (Latest error)

Home positioning detection log data (Byte 0 to 3 of 16 bytes)
COMERR1:*13
Communications error history
BACKUP VER:
Backup data file version of machine information (Function code 46)
RESET
COUNT*14
Reset count
5-66
Confidential
After all of the log information items above are displayed, pressing the Black Start (Mono
Start) key returns the screen to the calendar clock in step (1) above.
*1 With the S/N being displayed, pressing the OK key toggles between the following two
indications.
S/N:
Serial number information
************** Serial number of the machine
The serial number of the machine can be changed with the following procedure.
1) With the serial number being displayed, press the OK key and then press the 9, 4, 7 and 5
keys in this order.
The uppermost digit of the current serial number flashes.
2) Enter the uppermost digit of the desired serial number with numerical keys, then press the
key to move the cursor to the next lower digit. In the same way, enter the remaining 14
digits.
Entry of alphabet letters
To enter an alphabet letter, press the corresponding numerical key repeatedly until the target
alphabet letter appears.
Numerical keys
Letters supported
2ABC
3DEF
4GHI
5JKL
6MNO
7PQRS
8TUV
9WXYZ
3) Upon completion of entry of all digits, press the OK key.

The machine saves the newly entered setting and returns to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode.
To cancel the entry of a serial number halfway through the above procedure, press the Stop/
Exit key. The machine returns to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
*2 With the PictBridge information being displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through the
following items.
PICTBRIDGE:
BROTHER
Vendor name
***-*****
Model name
**/**
Profile version/DPS version (not required for servicing)
BR0000**
PictBridge serial number (not required for servicing)
*3 With the log information being displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through black,
yellow, cyan, and magenta.
5-67
Confidential
*4 With the page information being displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through the
following items.
PAGE:
Total printed page count, indicating how many pages have been printed
since the machine was produced
TOTAL_BK
Total number of printed pages (in monochrome)
TOTAL_CL
Total number of printed pages (in color)
A3_BK
Number of printed A3-/Ledger pages (in monochrome)
A3_CL
Number of printed A3-/Ledger pages (in color)
OTHERS_BK
Number of printed pages except A3-/Ledger pages (in monochrome)
OTHERS_CL
Number of printed pages except A3-/Ledger pages (in color)
*5 With the log information being displayed, pressing the OK key toggles between black and
color.
*6 With the total page count of the paper size and type being displayed, pressing the OK key
cycles through the following items.

A3P
Total printed page count of A3 plain paper
A3I
Total printed page count of A3 inkjet paper
A3G
Total printed page count of A3 glossy paper
A4P
Total printed page count of A4 plain paper
A4I
Total printed page count of A4 inkjet paper
A4G
Total printed page count of A4 glossy paper
46P
Total printed page count of 4 x 6 inch and postcard plain paper
46I
Total printed page count of 4 x 6 inch and postcard inkjet paper
46G
Total printed page count of 4 x 6 inch and postcard glossy paper
L P
Total printed page count of Photo L plain paper
L I
Total printed page count of Photo L inkjet paper
L G
Total printed page count of Photo L glossy paper
*7 With the total page count of the paper size and type in duplex printing being displayed,
pressing the OK key cycles through the following items.

DX_A3P:
Total printed page count on A3-size, plain paper in duplex printing
DX_A4P
Total printed page count on A4-size, plain paper in duplex printing
DX_46P
Total printed page count on 4 x 6 plain paper in duplex printing
DX_46I
Total printed page count on 4 x 6, inkjet paper in duplex printing
DX_46G
Total printed page count on4 x 6, glossy paper in duplex printing
*8 With a purging count being displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through the following
items.
eIp_
Engine setup purge count (automatic/manual)
uIP_
Initial purge count (automatic/manual)
RP_
Periodical reset purge count (automatic/manual)
SRP_
Small reset purge count (automatic/manual)
SP_
Periodical suction purge count (automatic/manual)
RP2_
Periodical vent purge count (automatic/manual)
CP_
Ink cartridge replacement purge count (automatic/manual)

5-68
Confidential
*9
NP_
Normal purge count (automatic/manual)
RP3_
User reset purge count (automatic/manual)
PP_
Power reset purge count (automatic/manual)
QPP_
Power purge count (automatic/manual)
t_FLS
Periodical flushing count (only after printing in color)
With a machine error code being displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through recent
nine errors that have occurred.
Pressing the
key toggles between the following two indications.
TIME:
Date when the error occurred
TEMP:
Ambient temperature when the error occurred
*10 With the FB page count being displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through the following
items.
FB:
Flat-bed page count, indicating how many documents have been

scanned
ADF
ADF page count, indicating how many pages the ADF has fed
FAX_COUNT
Fax scanning count
SCAN_COUNT
Scanning count
*11 Displays the following home positioning error codes of the CIS unit.
E1:
Vertical scanning rough detection error
E2:
Horizontal scanning rough detection error
E3:
Vertical scanning edge detection error
E4:
Horizontal scanning edge detection error
00:
No error detected
*12 Displays 16 bytes of white reference film data detected.

HP_LOG1:
HP_LOG2:
HP_LOG3:
HP_LOG4:
*13 With a communications error code being displayed, pressing the OK key cycles through
the latest error, 2nd latest error, and 3rd latest error.
*14 Excluding the resets triggered by the following
Function codes 01 and 91
Function code 80 (Resetting the purge and flushing counts)
With the reset count displayed, pressing the OK key displays the following.
POWER:
Power-ON duration at the time of last reset
5-69
Confidential
1.4.32 Equipment Error Code Indication (Function code 82) (User-accessible)

Function
This function displays an error code of the last error on the LCD.
Operating Procedure
The LCD shows the "MACHINE ERROR X X."
1.4.33 Assurance Mode Switch Setting (Function code 88) (User-accessible)

Function
The machine incorporates five assurance mode switches (AMS01 through AMS05) that are
firmware switches just as the ones described in Section 1.4.6 in this chapter.
When the machine does not function normally because the usage environments or operating
conditions are not usual, the assurance mode switches provide workarounds to make the
machine usable by changing the machine settings to untypical ones.
The user is allowed to access the assurance mode switches under the guidance of service
personnel (e.g., by telephone).
The details about AMS01 through AMS05 are described on the following pages.
Operating Procedure
The machine displays "AMS00" on the LCD and becomes ready to accept an assurance
mode switch number.
(2) Enter the desired number from the assurance mode switch numbers (01 through 05).
The following appears on the LCD:
Selector 1
Selector 8
AMSXX = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(3) Use the
and
keys to move the cursor to the selector position to be modified.
(4) Enter the desired number (0 or 1) using the 0 and 1 keys.

(5) Press the OK key. This operation saves the newly entered selector values onto the
EEPROM and readies the machine for accepting an assurance mode switch number.
(6) Repeat steps (2) through (5) until the modification for the desired assurance mode switches
is completed.
5-70
Confidential
Notes:
To cancel this operation and return the machine to the initial stage of the
maintenance mode during the above procedure, press the Stop/Exit key.
If there is a pause of more than one minute after a single-digit number is entered for
double-digit assurance mode switch numbers, the machine will automatically
return to the initial stage of the maintenance mode.
Initializing the EEPROM with Function code 01 or 91 initializes the AMS switch
settings.
AMS01 (Printing assurance 1)
Selector
No.
Function
Setting and Specifications
Prevention of stains on back side of

leading edge of paper in borderless
printing
0: Disable (default)
1: Enable
Ink stains reduction mode in printing

received faxes
1: Enable
Protection of platen from no-paper

printing to prevent stains
(Functional restriction on the paper
width sensor)
No. 3 4
0 0 : Enable (Determine the sensor
function depending upon the print
resolution selected) (default)
0 1 : Enable (Detect the leading edge
plus right and left edges of paper)
1 0 : Enable (Detect the leading edge
of paper)
1 1 : Disable (No paper detection)
Assurance print 1
(Printing with black and cyan inks in
monochrome copy)
1: Enable
Assurance print 2
(Printing with black and cyan inks in
monochrome FAX reception and in list
output)
1: Enable
7
8
Workaround for false jam detection

(Functional restriction on the paper
width sensor)
No. 7 8
0 0 : Detect both the leading edge and
width of paper (default)
0 1 : Detect both the leading edge and
width of paper
1 0 : Detect only the leading edge of
paper
1 1 : No detection
Selector 1: Prevention of stains on back side of leading edge of paper in borderless printing
Setting this selector to "1" reduces the protruding amount of the leading edge of recording
paper to the platen groove to minimize stains that could be caused by ink mist on the back
side of the leading edge. Enabling this function reduces the throughput than disabling it.
Selector 2: Ink stains reduction mode in printing received faxes
When the print density of received faxes is high in printing, ink can adhere to the paper
feed related rollers, resulting in stains on printed paper. If this happens, enable this ink
stains reduction mode to lower the print resolution for reducing the adherence of ink.
5-71
Confidential
Selectors 3 and 4: Protection of platen from no-paper printing to prevent stains (Functional
restriction on the paper width sensor)
The setting made by these selectors applies to such printing that is assumed to be at a high
resolution, that is, printing from a PC or memory card, copying, and printing via
PictBridge.
If these selectors are set to "0, 0," the machine automatically determines the functions of
the paper width sensor depending upon the print resolution selected. Therefore, in low
resolution printing, e.g. when the "Fast" print quality is selected, the paper width sensor is
automatically disabled. On the contrary, in high resolution printing, e.g. when the
"Highest" print quality is selected, the sensor is automatically enabled.
Setting these selectors to "1, 1" disables the paper width sensor to save the sensing time for
higher throughput.
Selectors 5 and 6: Assurance print 1 and 2
Enabling assurance print 1 or 2 causes the machine to mix black ink (pigment-based) and a
little of cyan ink (dye-based) to use in monochrome copy or in monochrome FAX reception
and list output, respectively.
If black ink is not jetted out normally, cyan ink can be substituted for black ink in printing.
This ensures that in list printing (in which data once printed will be deleted) the data will be
preserved as a printout.
Selectors 7 and 8: Workaround for false jam detection (Functional restriction on the paper width
sensor)
The setting made by these selectors applies to the list and index printing and test printing.
When logo printed recording paper is used, for example, the paper width sensor might
misdetect the paper present state as "no paper loaded" due to the logo's color. Limiting the
paper width sensor functions with these selectors avoids detecting such a false paper jam.

Selector
No.
Function
1
2
Not used.
Paper feed amount compensation

(for preventing banding at the leading edge of
recording paper fed from the photo tray)
No. 3 4 5
0 0 0: Enable for 4 x 6 postcards
(default)
1 0 0: Enable for Photo L-size
paper in Japan
Others: Disable
|
5
Registration time offset to slipping in plain

paper feeding
1: Enable
Unidirectional print for higher print quality
1: Enable
Improvement of paper feeding reliability
1: Enable
5-72
Confidential
Selectors 3 to 5: Paper feed amount compensation (for preventing banding at the leading edge
of recording paper fed from the photo tray)
This compensation function is usually enabled for preventing banding (horizontal streaks)
from occurring at the leading edge of recording paper fed from the photo tray.
When postcards or small size paper are fed from the standard paper tray, however, this
compensation function can be counterproductive. If so, disable the function, and the print
quality may be improved.
Selector 6: Registration time offset to slipping in plain paper feeding
Enabling the registration time offset with this selector increases the registration time
(during which the paper feed roller rotates in the reverse direction), avoiding the
occurrence of a paper feeding timeout error even if the paper cannot reach the registration
sensor actuator within the predetermined registration time due to slipping of the paper pullin rollers against paper in the paper tray.
Selecting the "Fast" print quality disables the registration time offset even if it is enabled
with this selector.
NOTE: Selecting the "Glossy paper" automatically enables the registration time offset.
Selector 7: Unidirectional print for higher print quality
The machine prints bidirectionally by default. To get higher print quality, set this selector to
"1" to switch to the unidirectional print mode in which printing is performed only when the
head/carriage unit travels from left to right. Note that the unidirectional print mode
sacrifices the print speed.
Print object
Unidirectional print
Print FAX message received
Yes
Copy
Yes
Print from PC
No
Print from memory cards or via PictBridge
Yes
Print memory card index or PictBridge index
Yes
Print a list
Yes
Print a test pattern
No
Selector 8: Improvement of paper feeding reliability
Setting this selector to "1" improves the paper feeding reliability, sacrificing the print
speed.
5-73
Confidential
AMS03 (Maintenance assurance 1)

Selector
No.
Function
Protection of head caps from drying
No. 2
0
0
1
1
2
3
Auto capping start time
Purge more powerful than normal

purge
3
0
1
0
1
1: Enable
: 30 seconds (default)
: 5 seconds
: 15 seconds
: 300 seconds
1: Enable
5
6
Not used.
Automatic purging interval

programmed for matching the
ambient temperature (for color ink)
0: Enable (default)
1: Disable
Automatic purging interval

programmed for matching the
ambient temperature (for black ink)
0: Enable (default)
1: Disable
Selector 1: Protection of head caps from drying
If the protection function is enabled with this selector, the head/carriage unit automatically
returns to the home position (head capping position) for flushing each time the machine
prints the specified number of pages in order to protect the inside of the head caps from
drying up. This function is useful in a dry environment or for heavy duty print per printing
cycle.
Selectors 2 and 3: Auto capping start time
If data transfer from the PC stops midway through printing for some reason in the PC, the
head/carriage unit automatically returns to the home position (head capping position) after
the specified auto capping start time (default: 30 seconds) to prevent the head surface from
drying up. At the restart of printing after the auto capping operation, print image
unevenness could occur. To avoid it, increase the auto capping start time with these
selectors.
Selector 4: Purge more powerful than normal purge
Setting this selector to "1" automatically selects a purge more powerful than the normal
purge from the first if the purge is initiated immediately after printing.
Selectors 7 and 8: Automatic purging interval programmed for matching the ambient
temperature
The "automatic purging interval programmed for matching the ambient temperature" is
enabled by default. If the machine is set in an excessively hot or cold place, therefore, the
automatic purging interval becomes short, resulting in increased ink waste.
Disabling this interval enables the one programmed for the ordinary temperature. In the
first printing after a long no-print period, however, the print quality may lower.
5-74
Confidential
AMS04 (Maintenance assurance 2)

Selector
No.
Function
Line monitor volume
Not used.

0: Normal (default)
1: Extra-high
0: Printable with black ink only for a certain

amount after detection of "Replace Ink"
1: Printable with black ink only regardless of
color ink remaining
Black ink print mode
Automatic purging for color ink
Not used.
0: Enable (default)
No. 6
0
0
1
1
6
7
Periodical purging interval
Automatic purging for black ink
7
0
1
0
1
:
:
:
:
1: Disable
Prescribed purge intervals

30 days (black), 60 days (color)
30 days (black), no purge (color)
No purge (black and color)
0: Enable (default)
1: Disable
Selector 3: Black ink print mode
If any color ink runs out, printing is no longer possible by default. Setting this selector to
"1" allows the machine to function as a monochrome printer, making it possible to print
with black ink only even in a "Replace Ink" state as listed below.
Printing FAX message received*
Printing from a PC
Copying
Printing from memory cards
Printing via PictBridge
Printing lists
Purge operation
Monochrome printing only possible. (A color FAX message will

be printed in monochrome.)
Monochrome printing only possible.
Monochrome printing only possible. The Black Start (Mono
Start) key is enabled, but the Color Start key is disabled.
No printing possible.
No printing possible.
Monochrome printing only possible.
Purge operation possible for black ink only, not possible for allcolor or any specific color.
*For the MFC only
TIP: Difference between selector 3 on AMS04 and selector 8 on WSW49 (For details,
refer to the "Firmware Switches (WSW)" document separately issued.)
Both selector 3 on AMS04 and selector 8 on WSW49 specify the similar black ink print
mode that applies if any color ink runs out. The difference is that the former allows the
machine to print all data received as a monochrome printer with black ink only; the latter to
ignore the "Replace Ink" state, receive both color and black data, and print it, resulting in a
printout missing color components.
Selectors 4 and 8: Automatic purging for color ink and for black ink
The machine periodically performs an automatic purge by default. The automatic purge,
however, wastes ink when no printing has occurred. To avoid it, disable the automatic
purge with these selectors. In the first printing after a long no-print period, disabling it may
lower the print quality.
Setting selector 4 or 8 to "1" disables the setting made by selectors 6 and 7.
5-75
Confidential
Selectors 6 and 7: Periodical purging intervals
These selectors allow you to select the periodical purge interval to reduce ink consumption.
Setting these selectors "0, 0" (Prescribed purge intervals) performs purging at the intervals
prescribed below.
Within 180 days from replacement of ink cartridges
Periodical reset purge (black and color) at 60-day intervals
Periodical suction purge (black) at 30-day intervals
After 180 days from replacement of ink cartridges
Periodical suction purge (black) at 30-day intervals
Periodical suction purge (color) at 60-day intervals
Periodical discharge purge (black and color) at 90-day intervals
Setting these selectors to "1, 0" (30 days (black), no purge (color)) disables the setting
made by selector 4.
Setting these selectors to "1, 1" (No purge (black and color)) disables the settings made by
selectors 4 and 8.

Selector No.
Function
Uneven printing correction for

upper and lower ends of the
nozzle
0: ON (default)
Switching of jam prevention

mode for duplex printing
0: Jam prevention mode

(Top and bottom margins: 22 mm)
1: Standard margin print mode
(Top and bottom margins: 3 mm)
3
4
Not used.
Jam reduction paper feed mode
0: Disable (default) 1: Enable
Adjustment of print head drive

voltage rank
No. 3
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
6
|
8
4
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
5
0:
0:
1:
0:
1:
1:
0:
1:
1: OFF
+0
-0
+1
+2
+3
-1
-2
-3
Selector 1: Uneven printing correction for upper and lower ends of the nozzle
If performing the correction lowers the print quality due to wrong nozzle property data, set
this selector to "1" to disable the correction function.
Selector 2: Switching of jam prevention mode for duplex printing
If a print margin is large for printing on large size paper in duplex printing, a jam may
occur during switchback of the recording paper. To prevent such a jam, set this selector to
"0" to make the print margin 22 mm. This function is available only in duplex copying.
5-76
Confidential
Selector 5: Jam reduction paper feed mode
Setting this selector to "1" lowers the paper feeding speed when the recording paper passes
along the star wheels for reduction of jams.
Selectors 6 through 8: Adjustment of print head drive voltage rank
This selector regulates the print head drive voltage rank for adjusting the ink drop amount.
If the black section printed on glossy paper is greenish or the printed ink does not dry
quickly, increase the print head drive voltage rank to decrease the ink drop amount; if it is
reddish, decrease the rank to increase the ink drop amount.
5-77
Confidential
OTHER SERVICE FUNCTIONS
2.1
Cancellation of the Pin TX Lock Mode (Not applicable to Japanese and

U.S.A. models)
Function
This procedure cancels the Pin TX lock mode. Use this procedure if the user forgets his/her
password entered when setting the Pin TX lock mode so as not to exit from the mode.
Note: Carrying out this procedure loses passwords previously entered but retains FAX
messages received in the Pin TX lock mode.
Operating Procedure
(1) Models without touch panel

When the PIN TX LOCK is displayed on the LCD, press the Menu and # keys at the same
time. Within two seconds, start to press the 2, 7, 9, 0, and 0 keys.
Models with touch panel
When the PIN TX LOCK is displayed on the LCD, press the Copy and # keys at the same
time. Within two seconds, start to press the 2, 7, 9, 0, and 0 keys.
The Pin TX lock mode will be canceled and the machine returns to the calendar clock
screen.
2.2
Displaying the Firmware Version

Pressing the combination of the following keys simultaneously displays the firmware version.
Press the * and # keys simultaneously.
Models without numerical keypad Press the
2.3
and Stop/Exit keys simultaneously.
Moving the Head/Carriage Unit

Holding down the Stop/Exit key with the document scanner unit opened for more than five
seconds moves the head/carriage unit.
5-78
Confidential
2.4
Retrieving the Equipment Log Information

Function
This procedure retrieves the log information from the machine to the connected PC as
electronic data.
Operating Procedure
(1) Make sure that the power cord of the machine is unplugged from an electrical outlet.
If the machine is connected to a PC, disconnect the USB cable.
(2) Switch your PC on.
(3) Create an arbitrary folder in the C: directory and save the readback tool (rb2k03.exe) and
PJL command file (brmainten_77.pjl) in that folder.
(4) Plug the power cord of the machine into an electrical outlet to turn the power on.
(5) Switch the machine to the maintenance mode. (Refer to Section 1.1 in this chapter.)
(6) Connect the machine to the PC using a USB cable.
(7) On the PC, start Command Prompt and change to the directory where the readback tool is
located.
(In the example below, a "SendPJL" folder is created in the C: directory and the readback
tool is saved in that folder.)
(8) In Command Prompt, type rb2k03.exe brmainten_77.pjl brmainten_77.txt /T3 and

press the Enter key.
Note: Be sure to enter a space to the points marked with an asterisk (*) shown below.
rb2k03.exe*brmainten_77.pjl*brmainten_77.txt*/T3
Otherwise, an error occurs.

brmainten_77.txt is created in the arbitrary folder.
(9) In Excel, open the created text and delete texts added by the PJL stipulation.
5-79
Confidential
CHAPTER 6 CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AND WIRING DIAGRAMS

MJ PCB
U.S.A., Canadian, Asian, and Oceanian models
MJ-64J-RD315K(LF)
L4
DL-6503C
C221
C221
F2
@C8
C2
NC
L6
DL-6503C
D1
C153
50VDC
(1608)
1 La
2 Lb
CN1
@C5
@C6
TRF250-183
NC6
@CN3
RCH-855 332K
@L1
to
MAIN
SDAA
@C4
C682
50VDC
(1608)
250V
Tb 4
RCH-855 332K
C474
D5
Lb 3
S0V
@C9
P3100ECL
TRF250-183
La 2
@L3
C1
Ta1
TVB270SC-L
D3
F1
NC
PS2521-1
@PH1
A
to
Line
NC 5
POL
@JW2
C473
50VDC
(1608)
D6
C153
50VDC
(1608)
@R2
RA-242M-C6
39k
RA-242M-C6
to
EXT
100k
(1608)
@R3
@L2
JW3
0
0
@R4
11
L5
DL-6503C
1SS120TD-E
Ta 3
S0V
0 (1608)
FG1 FG2
D2
Tb 4
NC
12
FG 7
SW1
NC
FG 8
S0V
CN4
330
1/4W
R1
52830-6245(LF)
RELAY
S0V
@CN2a
2 S0V
@CN2b
3 S0V
RELAY
1 RELAY
2 RELAY
POL
B2B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)1 POL
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)
to Main PCB
6-1
Confidential
MJ PCB
European models
MJ-64J-RD315K(LF)
L4
DL-6503C
C221
L6
DL-6503C
@C8
C2
NC
@C4
C682
50VDC
(1608)
D1
C153
50VDC
(1608)
1 La
2 Lb
CN1
@C5
@C6
TRF250-183
NC6
@CN3
RCH-855 332K
@L1
to
MAIN
SDAA
@C9
C221
F2
RCH-855 332K
250V
Tb 4
S0V
C474
D5
Lb 3
@L3
C1
TRF250-183
P3100ECL
TVB270SC-L
D3
F1
Ta1
La 2
NC
PS2521-1
@PH1
A
to
Line
NC 5
POL
@JW2
C473
50VDC
(1608)
D6
C153
50VDC
(1608)
@R2
RA-242M-C6
39k
RA-242M-C6
to
EXT
100k
(1608)
@R3
@L2
JW3
0
0
@R4
11
D2
L5
DL-6503C
1SS120TD-E
Ta 3
S0V
0 (1608)
FG1 FG2
12
Tb 4
NC
FG 7
SW1
NC
FG 8
S0V
CN4
330
1/4W
R1
52830-6245(LF)
RELAY
S0V
@CN2a
2 S0V
@CN2b
3 S0V
RELAY
1 RELAY
2 RELAY
POL
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)
to Main PCB
6-2
Confidential
MJ PCB
S. African models
MJ-64J-RD315K(LF)
L4
DL-6503C
C221
C682
50VDC
(1608)
L6
DL-6503C
@C8
C2
NC
@C4
D1
C153
50VDC
(1608)
1 La
2 Lb
CN1
@C5
@C6
TRF250-183
NC6
@CN3
to
MAIN
SDAA
@C9
C221
F2
RCH-855 332K
@L1
39K
250V
Tb 4
S0V
C474
D5
Lb 3
@L3
C1
TRF250-183
P3100ECL
TVB270SC-L
D3
F1
Ta1
La 2
NC
PS2521-1
@PH1
A
to
Line
NC 5
POL
@JW2
C473
50VDC
(1608)
D6
C153
50VDC
(1608)
@R2
RA-242M-C6
39k
RA-242M-C6
to
EXT
100k
(1608)
@R3
@L2
S0V
NC
D2
1SS120TD-E
11
SW1
L5
DL-6503C
S0V
0 (1608)
FG1 FG2
12
Ta 3
Tb 4
NC
FG 7
0
0
@R4
CN4
FG 8
JW3
330
1/4W
R1
52830-6245(LF)
RELAY
S0V
@CN2a
2 S0V
@CN2b
3 S0V
RELAY
1 RELAY
2 RELAY
POL
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)
to Main PCB
6-3
Confidential
Power supply PCB, 100 V series
6-4
Confidential
Power supply PCB, 200 V series
6-5
Confidential
Wiring diagrams
6-6
Confidential
APPENDIX 1. SERIAL NUMBERING SYSTEM

This appendix shows the location of labels put on some parts and describes the coding information for
serial number and head property data.
Reading Labels
An individual machine has a "serial number label" for the machine itself and "property labels"
for the head/carriage unit.
This section lists the coding information for those serial number and head property data.
(1) Serial number label for the machine itself
(app01a)
Location
(serial_number_label_mini11)
Serial number label
App. 1-1
Confidential
(2) Head property labels

The property code of the head/carriage unit is printed on head property labels--bar code
label and QR code label, each of which is attached to the lower cover and the head/carriage
unit, respectively.
On the lower cover
Head property code
ALR7795500000
Production lot number

Serial number (5-digit)
Line number
Production year
(Example) 1 : 2011
2 : 2012
Production month
A : January
G : July
B : February H : August
C : March
J : September
D : April
K : October
E : May
L : November
F : June
M : December
(bar_code_label)
Location
Head property label

(Bar code label)
(head_property_mini11)
On the head/carriage unit
Location
Head property label
(QR code label )
(head_property_label_M11)
App. 1-2
Confidential
APPENDIX 2. DELETION OF USER SETTING INFORMATION

This appendix provides instructions on how to delete user setting information recorded in the machine.
A2.1 Deleting User Setting Info from the Machine

The following user setting information in the machine is recorded in the EEPROM on the main
PCB. It can be deleted with the operating procedure given below.
User's name and telephone number

Speed dialing
Group dialing
Dial record (stored for redialing)
Receiver info for fax transfer (The transfer setting will also be canceled.)
Data stored in the memory (Received data and voice messages will also be deleted.)
Fax preview
Fax data not yet transferred in PC-Fax receiving (Fax data already transferred to the PC will
not be deleted.)
Fax data waiting to be sent in polling
Receiver info for timer faxing
Receiver info for broadcasting or batch transmission
Caller ID history
Activity report
Passwords assigned by the secure function lock (for models with secure function lock)
Favorite copy settings (for models with touch panel)
Network settings (e-mail addresses, server settings, account settings, etc.)
Operating Procedure

(2) Press the
or
to choose Initial Setup.
Press the OK key.

TIP: In models with touch panel, press Initial Setup.
(3) Press the
or
to choose Reset.
Press the OK key.

TIP: In models with touch panel, press Reset.
(4) Press
or
to choose All Settings.
Press the OK key.

TIP: In models with touch panel, press Yes.
(5) Press the 1 key twice to reboot the machine.
TIP: In models with touch panel, press Yes.
App. 2-1
Confidential
APPENDIX 3. INSTALLING THE MAINTENANCE PRINTER DRIVER

To identify machines connected via USB direct interface, the PC requires the corresponding
driver for the virtual USB device. If you connect any number of machines to your PC, the same
number of virtual USB devices will be automatically configured on your PC. To prevent many
virtual USB devices from being configured, use the unique driver installation procedure
described below that enables your PC to identify terminals via one single virtual USB device.
NOTE: Once this installation procedure is carried out for a PC, no more driver/software
installation will be required for that PC to identify machines. If the Brother Maintenance USB
Printer driver has been already installed to your PC according to this procedure, skip this
section.
Windows 2000/Windows XP
(1) Check that the power cord of the machine is unplugged from the electrical outlet.
Disconnect the USB cable that connects the machine with your PC.
(2) Turn on your PC.
(3) Plug the power cord of the machine into an electrical outlet.
The following window appears.
(6) The following screen appears, indicating the detection of new hardware device by the
system. Select "No, not this time." And click Next.
App. 3-1
Confidential
(7) Select "Install the software automatically (Recommended)" and click Next.
(8) Alert warning message of WHQL appears. Click Continue Anyway to proceed.
App. 3-2
Confidential
(9) Repeat steps (6) to (8) three times to complete installation.

(10) If the Brother Maintenance USB Printer driver is successfully installed, the following
message screen appears. Click Finish to return.
App. 3-3
Confidential
NOTE: In order to check whether the printer driver is successfully installed, click Start |
Settings | Printers to select the Printers window. Then, check that the Brother Maintenance
USB Printer icon is shown.
App. 3-4
Confidential
Windows Vista/Windows 7
(1) Check that the power cord of the machine is unplugged from the electrical outlet.
Disconnect the USB cable that connects the machine with your PC.
(2) Turn on your PC.
(3) Click the Setup.exe in the Brother Maintenance USB Printer held in an arbitrary folder.
(4) Wait for the following screen to appear and click Next.
The following screen is displayed during installation.
App. 3-5
Confidential
(5) Wait for the following screen to appear and click Finish.
(6) Plug the power cord of the machine into an electrical outlet.
The following window is displayed during installation.
If the following window appears, the installation is completed.
App. 3-6
Confidential

Manual Servicio Brother MFC - J280W

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Servicio Brother MFC - J280W

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Servicio Brother MFC - J280W

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Inkjet DCP/MFC

Read this manual thoroughly before maintenance work.

Copyright Brother 2011

SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 1-1

GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 1-1

Media Specifications.............................................................................................. 1-2

Paper Handling...................................................................................................... 1-5

LCD/Panel ............................................................................................................. 1-6

TELEPHONE ................................................................................................................ 1-11

PRINTER ...................................................................................................................... 1-13

SCANNER .................................................................................................................... 1-15

SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................. 1-16

NETWORK ................................................................................................................... 1-17

Network ............................................................................................................... 1-17

Wired ................................................................................................................... 1-17

SUPPLIES/OPTIONS ................................................................................................... 1-19

10 SERVICE INFORMATION............................................................................................ 1-20

ERROR INDICATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING..................................... 2-1

INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 2-1

Initial Check ........................................................................................................... 2-2

OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................... 2-3

Cross-section Drawings and Components ............................................................ 2-3

Paper Path for Documents and Recording Paper ................................................. 2-4

Parts Names and Functions .................................................................................. 2-5

Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 2-6

Components .......................................................................................................... 2-7

ERROR INDICATION ..................................................................................................... 2-8

Error Codes ........................................................................................................... 2-8

Error Messages ................................................................................................... 2-12

Communications Error Codes ............................................................................. 2-15

Status Monitor Errors........................................................................................... 2-19

TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................. 2-21

Error Cause and Solutions .................................................................................. 2-21

Recording Paper or Disc Tray Feeding Problems ............................................... 2-57

Disc tray not fed in (Error code 91) ............................................................. 2-58

Two or more sheets of paper fed at a time ................................................. 2-58

Recording paper jam ................................................................................... 2-59

Recording paper stained ............................................................................. 2-62

Disc tray stained.......................................................................................... 2-63

Print-image Problems .......................................................................................... 2-64

Defective images......................................................................................... 2-64

Troubleshooting from image defect............................................................. 2-65

Software-related Problems .................................................................................. 2-76

Network Problems ............................................................................................... 2-77

Cannot print data......................................................................................... 2-76

Cannot make a print through network connection....................................... 2-77

Document Feeding Problems .............................................................................. 2-78

Cannot feed documents .............................................................................. 2-78

Document double feeding ........................................................................... 2-78

Document jam ............................................................................................. 2-79

Wrinkles on documents ............................................................................... 2-80

Scanned-image Problems ................................................................................... 2-81

Defective images......................................................................................... 2-81

Troubleshooting from image defect............................................................. 2-81

Other scanning problems ............................................................................ 2-85

Control Panel Problems....................................................................................... 2-86

LCD shows nothing ..................................................................................... 2-86

Control panel inoperative ............................................................................ 2-86

Lamps on the control panel do not light ...................................................... 2-87